Best egyptian slot games.Makakuha ng libreng 700pho sa bawat deposito https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/industry/ Casino.org Online Casino Blog covers the latest news, tips, strategies and in-depth articles about the online casino industry and gambling in general. Mon, 16 Sep 2024 14:48:17 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.4.5 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/cropped-corg-favicon-512-32x32.png Gambling Industy News & Blog posts - Casino.org Blog https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/industry/ 32 32 5 Trailblazing Female Poker Players �� And Why Women��s Voices Matter in Poker https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/female-poker-player/ https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/female-poker-player/#respond Thu, 19 Sep 2024 14:33:21 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=42025 Female Poker Players: What You Need to Know
  • Trailblazers: Female poker players like Maria Ho, Jennifer Harman, and Barbara Enright who have won prestigious poker events are paving the way in the male-dominated poker industry.
  • WSOP Winners: Women such as Ga?lle Baumann and Kristen Foxen have made their mark with multiple World Series of Poker (WSOP) placings, highlighting female prowess in high-stakes poker.
  • Increasing Participation: While women have traditionally been underrepresented in poker tournaments, the tide is changing with more female players participating and winning significant poker tournaments.
  • Female Poker Leagues: Initiatives like the Women��s Poker Association and Ladies International Poker Series augment women��s presence in poker further by facilitating female-only games and fostering support networks.
  • Importance of Representation: A greater female presence in poker challenges traditional stereotypes, fosters diversity of thought and strategy, and encourages more women to participate, expanding the game’s popularity.

As a female poker player, I bring a unique perspective on the top women in the game and have had the opportunity to meet some of the greats �� Kristen Foxen is just as amazing in-person as she is on TV.

I��ve also taught women��s poker classes and authored a book, A Girl��s Guide to Poker. I won a contest entry to the World Series of Poker (WSOP) Main Event for my video saying that being feminine and good at poker aren��t mutually exclusive.

So I hope I can shed new light on some of the top female poker players in the game.

Title Image Credit: Roman Samborskyi/Shutterstock

Women��s Voices in Poker

Before exploring the most famous female poker players, I want to touch on the importance of women’s voices in the poker world. When I wrote my book A Girl��s Guide to Poker, I didn��t plan for it to be gendered. I just wanted to write authentically.

It might seem ironic, considering the back cover reads: ��So you want to play poker. Maybe it��s the cash. Maybe it��s the challenge. Maybe you��re turned on by guys in hoodies and sunglasses.��

But as I explain in the foreword of the book:

When I was in high school art class, we had to showcase our final portfolios. Mine didn��t have any particular theme other than getting turned in on time. But I��ll never forget what my art teacher had to say, ��You can tell that every one of these pieces was made by a woman.��

Her comment completely caught me by surprise. Adding a feminine tone or touch had never crossed my mind; I was just trying to paint a picture. I was so struck by the realization it was as though she had uncovered a hidden destiny. I now knew what I wanted to create in the world: art that could say anything about everything in life �� proudly said from a female point-of-view

The funny thing is that I never intended for it to be a ��women��s poker book�� �� I simply wanted to write a poker book in my own voice.

So let��s keep that in mind when evaluating the best female poker players of all time. Because my hunch is that most of them weren��t trying to ��play like a woman,�� but just play in the best and only way they know how, as themselves.

Best Female Poker Players �� Three Trailblazers

There are three women that come to mind for me as true pioneers of the game:

  1. Barbara Enwright
  2. Jennifer Harman
  3. Vanessa Selbst

Meet Barbara

Barbara Enwright played poker before it was cool. Long before poker was televised in sports bars across America and college guys knew what a ��flop�� was, Barbara was crushing the high stakes poker scene. She was a woman playing poker at a time when most men didn��t even play poker.

  • She is a 3-time WSOP bracelet winner
  • She won her first WSOP bracelet in 1986
  • She is the only woman to have ever made the final table for the WSOP Main Event

She finished 5th for $114,180 in the WSOP Main Event in 1995. To this day nearly twenty years later, no woman has repeated her feat.

Barbara was inducted into the Poker Hall of Fame along with Phil Hellmuth in 2007.

Meet Jennifer

When I was a kid, my dad would always love to watch High Stakes Poker on TV. And there was always one woman on the show I��d recognize �� Jennifer Harman.

She will go down as one of the greatest female poker players to ever play the game.

  • She has amassed $2.7 Million in live tournament earnings
  • She is a 2-time WSOP bracelet winner
  • She authored a chapter in Doyle Brunson��s iconic book sequel, Super System 2

Jennifer was a regular fixture in the notorious ��big game�� in Bobby��s Room, comfortably navigating the highest stakes in Vegas. Growing-up, her visibility on high stakes poker shows and willingness to battle for pots in public will always make her a personal hero towards me.

Daniel Negreanu said, ��She was the most influential person in my development as a poker player.�� Jennifer was inducted into the Poker Hall of Fame in 2015.

Title Image Credit: nazarovsergey/Shutterstock

Meet Vanessa

Another one of the most famous female poker players has to be Vanessa Selbst. She was a mainstay on another iconic television show, PokerStars Big Game. To any viewer, one thing became immediately clear �� Vanessa was fearless.

And her resume speaks for itself.

  • She is the highest-earning female poker player of all time with $11.9 Million in live tournament winnings
  • She is a 3-time WSOP bracelet winner
  • She is the only woman to ever reach the #1 ranking in the world on the Global Poker Index

While Vanessa is known for her aggressive play style, she��s not as blindly bullish as she may come across. It��s fascinating to hear her thought processes. In a famous WSOP Main Event hand against another top female poker player, Ga?lle Baumann, Vanessa talks through her contemplation of folding a full house, keenly aware her opponent could have her beat.

The most fascinating insight I heard from Vanessa was a clip where she explained her table talk strategy. I will never forget what she said. Basically, she incorporated the word ��bluff�� as much as possible into her vocabulary �� so people always assume she��s bluffing. This means even the hand doesn��t pertain to her.

For instance, when someone wins a pot, she’ll casually say, ��Nice bluff!�� or ��Show the bluff!���� even if she knows they didn��t bluff at all. Why? The more players hear her talk about bluffing, the more likely they are to assume she��s bluffing herself, even when she holds a very strong hand.

While others are playing checkers, Vanessa is playing chess.

Best Female Poker Players �� Calm, Cool, and Calculated

One of the most famous female poker players has to be Maria Ho. She has stood the test of time, and remained top of the food chain for more than a decade �� including into the modern era.

Her accomplishments include:

  • Nearly $5.5 Million in live tournament earnings and #4 on the all-time money list for female poker players
  • In 2011, she finished in second place in a $5,000 No Limit Hold’em event for $540,020
  • In 2023, she won GG Poker��s ��Game of Gold�� by defeating Daniel ��Jungleman�� Cates in a head-up match �� he is currently one of the best poker players in the world

For me, the moment that changed how I saw Maria was this watergate hand where she folded a set of tens on the flop. No one could believe she folded �� and she was largely ridiculed for it. But what impressed me was her defense of her decision-making. She said even if she had the best hand, which she did, she knew the math. The likelihood of her having the best hand by the river was a little bit better than a coin flip.

It was a new, fascinating, ��play the long game�� perspective. Maria had the foresight and discipline to proverbially lose the battle in order to win the war.

While onlookers underestimated her as timid and cowardly, assuming she folded because she thought she was beat, Maria was two steps ahead and outplayed them all. Her results prove this.

Maria Ho��s steely demeanor and strategic discernment secure her place as one of the top female poker players of all time.

Title Image Credit: Roman LightField Studios/Shutterstock

Best Female Poker Players �� Next Generation Talent

No list in the 2020s would be complete without the mention of Kristen Foxen. She previously went by her maiden name Kristen Bicknell before marrying Alex Foxen �� one of the modern legends of poker with $32,959,074 in recorded live tournament earnings. They are poker��s true power couple.

Kristen has $8,321,809 in recorded live poker tournament earnings herself�� and counting. This year she was the ��last woman standing�� in the 2024 WSOP Main Event until her elimination in 13th place out of more than 10,000 entrants. (Maria Ho currently holds the record for being the last woman standing three different times in 2007, 2014, and the 2020 online version).

As someone who has personally met Kristen, it��s all the more exciting to see her succeed. She is skyrocketing to the top in an environment where poker is harder than ever �� and does it with a mix of ferocity and grace. She��s a tough competitor but also warm and the type of person who gives everyone the time of day. In my view, she��s a role model through and through.

Playing Like a Girl

Another book excerpt:

When I first spoke to a female poker pro about writing A Girl��s Guide to Poker, she liked the idea, but wanted to make sure it wasn��t… well… stupid. (I believe her word was ��diminutive��).

��Like pink razors?�� I replied.

��Exactly.��

Not that anything is wrong with pink razors in theory, but anyone who has ever used a standard drug store pink blade knows they are dull, cheap, and low quality. A Girl��s Guide needed to be different.

Feminine, but also sharp.

A Girl��s Guide to Poker is clearly told in a woman��s voice. It��s fun. It��s flirty. It��s upbeat. It��s unapologetically female in style �� not in substance. The content is just as hefty as any traditional man��s poker book. Because female doesn��t mean ��lite��.

Fewer women play poker, and for many reasons. Casinos are a boys�� club, practicing poker online is anti-social, girls aren��t encouraged to be as competitive and so on. I��d say the main reason, however, is that the game isn��t inclusive to beginners.

You can��t learn poker overnight.

Learning poker is like learning a language �C it takes everyday practice. And whereas guys have frat parties and camping trips and military missions and beer games to practice gradually, casually, and safely, I��ve never had a girlfriend invite me to a poker game. Ever.

Most men and women who play poker learned from someone else. And if you weren��t in groups who played poker, you were basically S.O.L.

That��s why women role models are so important.

Learning about the greats and the ��best�� female poker players isn��t a vanity exercise �� it��s critical for getting more women into the game. Currently less than 4% of the WSOP Main Event is women �� and on the decline.

See this graph from poker reporter Jennifer Newell, another wonderful woman in this industry. The numbers are bleak.

We need more women in this industry to pave the way for future female greats. One of my favorite parts of poker is that you meet people from all walks of life �� different cities, jobs, and politics.

In a time where our world is more divided than ever �� including across gender lines �� sitting around at the poker table is a meaningful act of coming together.

Title Image Credit: Roman Samborskyi/Shutterstock

]]>
https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/female-poker-player/feed/ 0
Poker Equity Calculator: Master Your Game with Accurate Odds https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/poker-equity-calculator-master-your-game-with-accurate-odds/ Wed, 18 Sep 2024 14:51:39 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=42009 What is a Poker Equity Calculator: What You Need to Know
  • In online poker, equity refers to your share of the pot at any point in the game. An equity calculator helps ascertain these odds accurately.
  • Using a poker equity calculator can help make informed decisions about whether to bet, call, raise, or fold, by providing a mathematical prediction of the game’s outcome.
  • To calculate equity, you’ll need to input the cards you are holding, the cards on the table, and, optionally, hypothesized cards your opponent may be holding.
  • The calculator will provide your hand’s equity as a percentage, illustrating your chances of winning at that specific moment in the game.
  • Regular use of a poker equity calculator can aid in recognizing patterns, understanding specific hands, and enhancing overall poker strategy.

After several winning nights of poker around the kitchen table with friends, you may consider heading to a local poker room to test your luck against more seasoned players. However, these players donning their visors, sunglasses and headphones are playing a different game than you.

For many, poker is a means of testing their skills and mathematical abilities to seize the poker pot and push the beginner back out the door.

With a poker equity calculator, you��ll be better positioned to play more strategically and win more hands. Even if you��ve been playing for years, poker hand equity calculator can enhance your game play and increase your odds of winning.

Image: FabrikaSimf/Shutterstock

What is Equity in Poker?

Equity in poker is the amount of money you are likely to claim from the pot based on your current hand and your percentage of winning. In Texas Hold ��Em, for example, you would look at the two cards in your hand and the community cards dealt, if any.

Then you calculate your share of the pot based on your odds and use it to determine your next move. If there is $100 in the pot and your chances of winning are 50%, then your equity is $50.

But you can��t win 50% of the pot, right? You either win or lose. What the equity will tell you is how much you would expect to win on average if you were to be in the same situation over multiple hands.

With 50% equity, you��re just as likely to win as you are to lose and, therefore, over multiple hands in that same situation the average you would walk away with is $50.

Why is Calculating Equity Important in Poker?

If you can calculate how much you��re likely to win in any given poker hand, it also gives you insight into how much your opponent can potentially lose. This is a poker strategy that players use to increase the value of the pot or get their opponents to fold.

If you raise your bet, you raise the equity in the hand. If there is $100 in the pot and you raise $50, your opponent can call or raise. If they call, the pot size grows to $200 and your $50 equity now becomes $100. Imagine if you had 75% equity, then your equity increases as well.

If you can use your equity knowledge to get them to fold based on your raise, you now realize 100% equity of the pot.

What are the Types of Equity Calculators?

There are several poker calculators available for both online and offline use. While the list of available poker equity calculators may be extensive, here is a short list of some of the more popular options:

1. Equilab: Equilab allows for in-depth analysis of hand equity, equity vs. ranges, and much more. It��s known for being highly-customizable and user-friendly but does require some time to understand its full features.

2. PokerStove: PokerStove is best known for its precise equity calculations. It��s easy-to-use and it��s free! The price of free means the equity calculations are basic; although it��s a good choice for beginners.

3. Flopzilla: Flopzilla analyzes equity, hand ranges, and board textures with a highly interactive interface. You have to pay for the software but it offers a lot of functionality.

4. RunItOnce: For more advanced equity calculations and a greater focus on strategy, RunItOnce is a good tool for analyzing hand strength and equity. RunItOnce is a subscription so beginners or casual players might be turned off by the cost.

There are many more options, which include more online, offline and mobile app versions ranging in a variety of prices.

Image: J E Cooke/Shutterstock

How to Use the Poker Equity Calculator

A basic poker equity calculator is fairly easy to use and can provide insight in moments.

  • Once you open up the software or application, you��ll want to establish a new hand.
  • Select or input the cards you hold. For example, if you hold the King of Spades and the Ten of Hearts, select these cards.
  • Input any community cards that are on the table.
  • If you know the opponent��s exact hand, you can input it. How would you know this? Many players will use a poker equity calculator to determine the equity of a hand post-play. This helps when playing future hands with similar situations
  • If you don��t know the exact hand, you may have a range based on factors such as bet sizing and other tells.
  • Run the calculation which will compute the equity of your hand against the opponent’s hand or range.
  • Now you can check the equity percentages and see the likelihood of winning based on the current situation

Tips for Accurate Calculations

Just like when you��re learning how to play poker, there is a bit of a learning curve when it comes to calculating poker equity. Here are three tips to achieve more accurate calculations.

  1. Familiarize yourself with different features and options available in the calculator by practicing regularly.
  2. Take time to understand ranges and take note of common ranges for different positions and scenarios.
  3. Don��t limit yourself to a single tool. Try different calculators to find the one that best suits your style, expertise and overall intention.

Calculating Poker Odds and Equity

Determining the odds of winning versus losing a hand is key to mastering poker and something that must be top-of-mind during every moment of the game. Poker odds are simply the probability in which you��ll win or lose a hand. Every factor, from betting to raising to calling, will impact your odds.

Poker Odds vs. Poker Equity: What��s the Difference?

  • Poker odds are the ratio of probability of something happening versus something not happening. For instance, what are the poker odds that your three of a kind will win?
  • Poker equity refers to your share of the pot based on hand strength and possible outcomes.

While they are similar in nature and both can be used to determine whether or not you should raise, call or fold, equity is used to help make decisions based on the money in play and potential cards whereas odds are based on events happening or not happening.

The 2-4 Rule in Poker

The 2-4 rule in poker is a general guideline used to quickly assess the chances based on the number of outs you have (outs are the cards available that can improve your hand).

If you have a flush draw, you��ll want to know the likelihood of getting that fifth card to make the hand. If you have four spades between your hand and the flop, use the 2-4 rule to determine your chances of getting the flush. There are only 9 possible cards remaining that can give you the flush. To calculate getting that spade on the turn, you multiple 9 x 2 = 18. Therefore, there is an 18% chance of a spade coming on the turn.

If you want to calculate the odds of getting the flush with the turn or the river, multiply by 4. 9 x 4 = 36. The math says there��s a 36% chance.

Another example is calculating whether you can turn a pair of Aces into a three-of-a-kind. This time there are only two outs (the other two Aces):

  • On the turn: 2 x 2 = 4%
  • On the turn and the river: 2 x 4 = 8%

Image: RomanR/Shutterstock

Advanced Strategies for Poker Equity

Players can use equity and range analysis to determine their next best move. Instead of trying to figure out what your opponents specifically have, range analysis is used to consider a range of hands they might have. It��s almost like applying a series of if/then scenarios to determine your next move.

In Texas Hold ��Em and Omaha Hold ��Em, poker equity and range possibilities will constantly change as players make bets and new cards arrive in the flop, turn and river. Omaha is more complex because each player holds four cards instead of two. It can encourage players to stay in longer, which diminishes the equity of the pot.

Poker Hands and Their Equity

Here is a general breakdown of poker hands ranking from best to worst and their equity. With the exception of the Royal Flush, the true equity of each hand is specific to the situation.

HandsEquity Level
Royal Flush: 10 through Ace, all of the same suit.100% (this hand is unbeatable)
Straight Flush: Five consecutive cards of the same suit.Extremely High
Four of a Kind: Four cards of the same rankVery High
Full House: Three cards of one rank and two cards of another rankStrong
Flush: Five cards of the same suit; they do not need to be in sequenceGood
Straight: Five consecutive cards (8 through Q); they do not need to be of the same suitModerate
Three of a Kind: Three cards of the same rankModerate
Two Pair: Two cards of one rank and two cards of another rankOkay equity, but proceed with caution. The higher the rank of one pair, the better
Pair: Two cards of one rankWeak
High Card: The highest rank in the hand if no other hands applyExtremely Weak

Poker Equity Calculators FAQs

I��m a Beginner Poker Player. What do You Suggest?

The best way to learn how to use a poker equity calculator is get started and learn as you go. However, consider free video poker to give you the freedom to take your time and discover how to calculate poker equity with each hand. Once you��re comfortable, ease into live betting.

When Should I Use a Poker Equity Calculator?

Every time you play to understand your chances of winning a pot. After you��ve played a hand, you can review the game and calculating poker equity. This will show the impact of the decisions you made and you can learn what you could have done differently based on the outcome. If you lose the hand, you can use the Poker Equity Calculator to examine the other players�� thinking processes.

Are Poker Odds Calculators Allowed Online and in Casinos?

This is dependent on the establishment. There are some online poker sites that do not allow it so make sure to read their rules before playing. Most live dealer poker games within a casino or establishment prohibit poker equity calculators at the table, as well as most electronic devices.

Are There Additional Resources and Tools Available to Help Improve my Poker Game?

Check out this downloadable Poker Odds guide There are several websites and apps listed above that provide Poker Equity Calculators

]]>
Effective Online Blackjack Strategies to Improve Your Game https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/effective-online-blackjack-strategies-to-improve-your-game/ Mon, 09 Sep 2024 10:12:52 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=41886 Online Blackjack Strategy: What You Need to Know
  • Explore key online blackjack strategies to enhance your gameplay experience and increase your chances of winning.
  • Understand the unique aspects of playing blackjack online, such as live dealer games and electronic interfaces.
  • Utilize tactics like basic blackjack strategy charts and card counting simulations to improve your decision-making skills.
  • Take advantage of casino bonuses and promotions offered by online casinos to boost your bankroll and extend your playing time.
  • Stay disciplined with your betting limits and practice responsible gambling habits while enjoying online blackjack.

Mastering an online blackjack strategy can give you skills to boost your odds of winning and extend your bankroll. Below, we will introduce you to the best blackjack strategies and how you can use them to increase your skill and confidence.

Online Blackjack Strategy: Key Principles

Any good online blackjack strategy starts with understanding the basics of the game and learning how to play blackjack online. The good news is that learning blackjack is a relatively easy and combines skill and luck for an exciting casino experience.

Blackjack is a card game that involves multiple decks of cards. You play directly against the dealer to try and get a hand as close to 21 as possible without going over while also having a better value than the dealer. Online blackjack is usually played on between one and eight decks of cards, and both the player and dealer start with two cards.

With those cards, you can choose to ��Stand�� and only use your current two cards. Alternatively, you can ��Hit�� and take additional cards to potentially improve your hand. Card values determine the total of your cards, with cards 2 to 10 having their face value. Picture cards (jacks, queens, Kings) are valued at 10, and Aces can be 1 or 11. If you have a hand without an Ace, this is known as a hard hand. Hands with an Ace are known as soft hands.

So, how does this all come together during a game of blackjack? Let��s take a look:

  1. A round of blackjack begins with the player placing their bet.
  2. The dealer now deals two cards to you and two cards to themselves. Both your cards will be face down, and in most variants, the dealer has one card down and one card face up.
  3. Check your cards and decide if you want to Stand or Hit.
  4. You can also make other decisions, such as Split pairs or Double Down.
  5. Most variant rules state that the dealer must Stand if they have 17 or higher and must Hit if they have less than 17.
  6. Both player and dealer reveal their cards, and the winner is the one closest to 21 without going over (Bust).

Are Blackjack Strategies Important?

Blackjack strategies are useful but not necessary to play the game. Even so, whether you are a beginner or expert, a basic blackjack strategy is helpful. The goal of an online blackjack strategy is to give you clear instructions on which gameplay choices to make for each card combination you have. In other words, a blackjack strategy tells you when to Hit, Stand, double down, split, and so on.

Common Blackjack Terms You Need To Know About

Before you start using blackjack strategies, it is important to know classic blackjack jargon you will see often:

  • Deal: When the dealer gives you the cards you will use during gameplay.
  • Hit: If you want to improve your hand, you ��Hit�� and receive an additional card.
  • Stand: When you are happy with your hand, you ��Stand�� to stick with the two cards you have.
  • Split: A pair of cards with the same values, such as two 5��s, can be ��Split�� and receive cards for two hands, which you must bet the same amount on.
  • Double Down: With some card combinations, you can choose to double the bet.
  • Insurance: A side bet where you receive a payout if you lose when the dealer has a face-up Ace card.
  • Hole Card: The dealer��s card that faces down is known as the Hole.
  • Up Card: The dealer��s card facing up is the Up Card.
  • Blackjack: The best winning hand, featuring an ace and a ten, jack, queen, or king (21 in total).
  • Surrender: A side bet in some variants where you can ��surrender�� your hand and get 50% of your bet back.
  • Bust: If you or the dealer has a hand that is over the value of 21.
image for online poker strategy

Image credit: RomanR/Shutterstock

Online Blackjack Strategy: Basic Blackjack Strategy

When using an online blackjack strategy, you will be given a set of instructions on which actions to take with specific cards/hands. In simple terms, a basic blackjack strategy shows you what to do based on the hands you have. This makes this type of plan excellent for beginners who may not be confident or even experienced players who want more structure in their game.

To make blackjack strategies easy to understand, there are blackjack charts available that simplify all the actions you need to take. Blackjack tables are easy to read, and if you learn them, you can easily make the best gameplay decisions during blackjack hands. Below is an example of a basic blackjack strategy as a chart:

Your HandDealer Card: 5Dealer Card: 6Dealer Card: 7
Hard 10DoubleDoubleDouble
Hard 11DoubleDoubleDouble
Hard 12StandStandHit

As you can see in the simple chart above, it gives clear instructions on when you should Hit, Stand, Double, or Split. You can also see that the action you take is based on the specific cards you have in your hand. If you do not use a strategy, you will be on your own making gameplay decisions on each hand.

When To Hit And Stand

Scenarios when you should Hit or Stand are extensive, but you can use the following rules as a great starting point when learning how to win online blackjack:

  • ALWAYS choose to Hit if you have 11 or lower. It is impossible to bust by taking another card, so you will only be improving your hand. Because there are more than 10 value cards (10, Jack, Queen, or King) in blackjack decks, you have a higher chance of getting one and ending on a good hand.
  • In most situations, Stand when you have a hand of 17 or higher. This is a solid value on its own, and the chances of going bust if you Hit are high. More importantly, in most online blackjack variants, the dealer must hit on 17. There is a good chance the dealer will bust while you are sitting pretty on 17+.

What About Splitting?

Two cards of identical value, known as a pair, allow you to choose the Split side bet in many blackjack variants. This is a handy option because you can split these cards into two separate hands. The dealer will now provide two additional cards on the original split pair, creating two separate hands of two cards.

You will also need to double your bet, making a matching wager on your second hand. This can be a good option because you can double your potential payout. However, the trade-off is that in many online variants of blackjack, you must stand on both your new hands.

When to split in blackjack is an important skill, and below are some guidelines to help:

  • Face Cards: If you have a pair of Jacks, Queens, Kings, or 10s, you should not split. You already have an excellent hand that is likely to win and give you a payout.
  • Aces: Two Aces have a value of 11 and 1, giving you a total of 12. You can Hit your normal hand, but we recommend splitting Aces. With 16 cards with a value of 10 in a single deck four 10s, four Jacks, four Queens, and four Kings), you have a good chance of getting a 10 and 21 on both hands.
  • 8s: Most blackjack players hate a hand of 16 made. This value is too low to Stand and high enough to make Hitting risky. If you have two 8s, split them and try to make betting hands with your new cards.

Doubling Down in Blackjack

One of the most popular blackjack side bets is the Double Down. As the name suggests, you will essentially double your bet in an attempt to win a bigger payout. You can double down on any hand, but beating online blackjack involves knowing when to double down or not:

  • If your hand is a hard 9 (no ace in the hand) and the dealer has a face-up card of 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6, Double Down your bet.
  • Double Down when you have a hard hand of 10 or 11 and the dealer has a face-up card less than 10 or 11.
  • If you hold a soft hand (an ace in the hand) of 16, 17, or 18 and the dealer��s face-up card shows a 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6, you can Double Down.
  • Avoid doubling your bet if your hand is over 11 or if the dealer has an Ace face up.
image for online poker strategy

Image credit: RomanR/Shutterstock

Online Blackjack Strategy: Advanced Blackjack Techniques

Online blackjack strategy can expand beyond charts into different methods and techniques for expanding your gameplay and extending your bankroll. We will cover the more popular below:

Betting Systems

While a normal blackjack strategy provides guidance on which gameplay decisions to make, betting systems tell you which betting actions to take. They give information about what size of bet you should make instead of hand strength. Although, that means that betting systems can be more unreliable.

The Martingale is perhaps the best-known blackjack betting system. It is a negative progression, which means you increase bets when you lose. Specifically, in The Martingale, you double bets on a loss and halve them on a win.

Other important betting systems for blackjack players include the Paroli (positive progression, doubling bets on consecutive wins) and the D��Alembert (negative progression, increasing/decreasing bets by a fixed amount). While betting systems are fun, they do not guarantee wins.

Card Counting

Card counting is a controversial technique that involves tracking the cards dealt in a blackjack game to gain an advantage. It has taken a mythical position in blackjack, but it is actually a real technique. Card counting is not illegal in the US, but land-based casinos still tend to ban people they catch counting cards.

Online casinos avoid the topic by using random number generators (RNGs), but live dealer blackjack can be theoretically counted. However, the live casino game shuffles and swaps decks regularly enough to make counting mostly pointless.

Card counting involves assigning values to cards and tracking the running count. A positive count suggests more high-value cards remain, while a negative count indicates more low-value cards. The true count considers the running count in relation to the remaining decks.

Surrender Strategy

Surrender in blackjack is a side bet available on some variants, allowing the player to ��fold�� their hand early and receive half their bet back. If your hand is terrible, you will only lose half your wager instead of all of it.

How the surrender option works:

  1. Player��s Weak Hand: When the player��s face-up card is a 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6, and the dealer��s face-up is a 10 or Ace.
  2. No Further Play: Once the player surrenders, the hand finishes.

Side Bets

Blackjack purists will tell you that they dislike side bets. However, these bets are a part of many online blackjack variants, so we��ll let you decide if you enjoy them or not. Popular and common blackjack side bets include the following:

  • 21+3
  • Royal match
  • Over/under 13
  • Super sevens
  • Lucky ladies
  • Pair square

One of the important things about side bets is the compromise you make for exciting additional bets, which results in a larger house edge. If you are playing for fun, side bets are interesting. If you focus more on winning, you should avoid these types of bets.

Online Blackjack Strategy: Maximizing Wins in Online Blackjack

We put our team of expert blackjack players to work and asked them to compile the following online blackjack tips and guidelines. Below, you can make the most of online blackjack strategy and see the common pitfalls to avoid:

  • Always split pairs of 8s and Aces �C Whenever you have a pair of Aces or 8s, split the deck to create two separate hands.
  • Double Down a hard 11 �C You have a great chance of getting a top hand. The only exception is if the dealer must stand on a soft 17.
  • Never split 5s or 10s �C A pair of 10s is a total of 20, which is a winning hand in most cases. On 5s, it is worth hitting instead of splitting.
  • Never take the Insurance bet �C While it seems like a good option, the insurance bet significantly increases the house edge.
  • Avoid side bets �C Side bets also increase the house edge, which is why most players do not play them.
  • Strategies are best: Using a blackjack strategy, even a basic one, provides real statistical outcomes for each hand combination.
  • Beware of betting systems: Betting systems can be fun, but they do not guarantee wins and can burn through a bankroll if they do not work.
  • Watch your bankroll: As always, play blackjack within your financial means and never gamble with money you cannot afford to lose.
image for online poker strategy

Image credit: Kitreel/Shutterstock

Online Blackjack Strategy: Online Blackjack Resources

If you want to expand your blackjack knowledge further, the following resources can help:

  • Strategy Calculators: These are tools that assist players by making blackjack strategies more automated. Players input data, and the calculator uses algorithms and stats models to analyze the data and provide recommendations for potential outcomes.
  • Training Tools: Using a blackjack training tool can help you boost your hand knowledge and skills of when to Hit, Stand, Split, or Double. Tools provide practice scenarios that let you test strategies in real-game situations.
  • Recommended Reading: Check out our other detailed online blackjack strategy guides to learn how to beat online blackjack.

Online Blackjack Strategy: Frequently Asked Questions

  • Is there a strategy to online blackjack?

There can be, but it is not necessary. It is possible to play blackjack online with no strategy. However, there are online blackjack strategy methods that enhance gameplay by providing statistic-based gameplay actions and potential outcomes.

  • Is online blackjack beatable?

No, blackjack is not a ��beatable�� game. Yes, you can absolutely win when playing blackjack and even use strategies to increase your chances. However, blackjack is ultimately a game of luck, and the final outcome is always left to random chance.

  • Does a basic strategy work on online blackjack?

Yes, and basic blackjack strategy is arguably the best way to play the game. A basic strategy will simply instruct you on when to Hit, Stand, Split, or Double based on the specific cards you have. Information is given in an easy-to-read chart.

  • How to consistently win at blackjack?

When learning how to win on blackjack online, you��ll need to understand that blackjack is a game of luck. However, using a basic strategy can give you more control as you have better knowledge of which gameplay actions to take.

Title Image credit: Kitreel/Shutterstock

]]>
Mastering Blackjack: Proven Tips and Strategies for Success https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/blackjack-tips-and-strategies/ Thu, 05 Sep 2024 14:29:36 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=41870 Blackjack Tips: How to Improve Your Game
  • Dive into mastering blackjack by understanding key rules and embracing fundamental strategies that lay the foundation for a successful gaming experience.
  • Elevate your casino gameplay to a higher level by delving into the world of card counting techniques, a skill that seasoned players utilize to gain a statistical edge over the casino.
  • Harness the power of effective bankroll management strategies to ensure that your gaming funds are strategically allocated and safeguarded against unnecessary risks.
  • Explore the realm of advanced betting systems such as the Martingale or Paroli strategies to fine-tune your wagering approach and capitalize on favorable streaks at the blackjack table.
  • Continuously refine your blackjack skills through deliberate practice with free blackjack games, ongoing study, and adaptive gameplay strategies that evolve with your experience and insights gained from previous sessions.

Blackjack is a unique and exciting casino game that involves both skill and luck. It��s a simple game to learn, but one that requires studying and practice to master.

With that in mind, if you��re looking for proven tips and strategies on how to increase your chances of winning in blackjack, you��ve come to the right place!

This article will overview everything from basic blackjack tips to advanced strategies, money management techniques, and more. Read on to learn how to boost your success at the blackjack table.

Essential Blackjack Tips for Beginners

Before you start playing blackjack for real money, it��s essential to understand all of the basic blackjack rules. The objective of the game is to get as close to 21 without going over it and have a higher-valued total than the dealer. To do so, you have to decide when you want to hit, stand, double down, split, or exercise any of the other blackjack side bets.

Regarding basic strategy tips, there are several considerations that you should keep in mind to be a better blackjack player. Here are a few essential blackjack tips for beginners:

  • Always stand on a hard 17 or higher
  • Always stand on a total of 12 to 16 if the dealer��s upcard is 2-6
  • Double down on an 11 hand
  • Always split Aces and 8s
  • Never split 10s and 5s

If you��re playing blackjack in a live casino venue, it��s also good to learn the hand signals, as this will ensure a smoother and more immersive gambling experience. There are a handful of blackjack hand signals, so we��ll briefly cover each of them below:

  • Hit – If you want to add another card to your total, gently tap the table in front of you to signal the dealer that you want to hit.
  • Stand – If you��re content with your hand total and want to stand, wave your hand over your cards to signal to the dealer that you don��t want any additional cards.
  • Double Down – To double down, match your initial wager with the same amount of chips next to it and hold one finger up.
  • Split – If you want to split a pair, you place an additional bet matching your original wager and make a V-shape with two fingers next to your cards without touching them.
image for blackjack tips

Image credit: Netfalls Remy Musser/Shutterstock

Advanced Blackjack Strategies

When you��ve mastered the basic blackjack tips we��ve covered above, you can confidently move to more advanced strategies. In this regard, here are a few advanced tips for playing blackjack.

Using the Basic Strategy Chart

Blackjack is a decision-driven game, so every choice you make directly impacts your success in it. Luckily, the blackjack pros who have come before us have already outlined the optimal ways of playing the game. The best way to play blackjack is to use the optimal strategy chart that helps you make the right decision in every scenario.

A basic blackjack strategy chart considers your cards and the dealer��s upcard to instruct you when to hit, stand, split, double, or surrender. Of course, even this chart can��t guarantee a win every time. But, it can statistically give your hand the best winning chances.

Learning to read a blackjack chart is fairly straightforward, and you can even bring it to the casino. Moreover, many land-based venues even sell these helpful charts in-house. With this in mind, make sure to use the right chart for the blackjack variation you��re playing and never deviate from the basic strategy.

If you��re playing online, you can even play free blackjack in demo mode. This is a great way to practice using the basic strategy chart before you start playing with real money.

Mastering Card Counting

Card counting is arguably the most appreciated advantage technique among blackjack players. And for good reason. With optimal play and a well-practiced card-counting system, you can get approximately a 1% advantage over the casino, on average.

If you��re a beginner, mastering card counting can be challenging, but it��s still possible to master simple and effective card-counting systems like Hi-Lo with some practice. With that said, while card counting is a viable technique to obtain the edge, you should be aware that casinos frown upon this, and it doesn��t work in online games.

Understanding the True Count and Its Impact

Since nearly all casinos use six to eight blackjack decks for their games, counting cards is more complex than it used to be for single-deck blackjack. Primarily, to successfully count cards, you also need to understand the true count and how it affects the blackjack house edge.

In simplest terms, the true count represents the average ratio of high to low cards remaining per deck. For instance, let��s say that the true count is +2. This means that there are two more high cards per deck than low cards, giving you a slight advantage over the casino.

image for blackjack tips

Image credit: Netfalls Remy Musser/Shutterstock

Blackjack Tips: Money Management Techniques

Apart from understanding basic and advanced blackjack strategies, knowing how to manage your money is a vital part of being successful when playing blackjack. So, to make sure you have this aspect covered as well, we��ve prepared a few helpful money management tips.

Setting a Budget and Sticking to It

Setting a blackjack bankroll is the most important part of proper money management. This bankroll should only be up to the maximum amount you can afford to lose without experiencing any financial strain.

Set a total bankroll and a session bankroll that you��ll take with you for individual gambling sessions. Creating these clear financial guidelines will enable you to enjoy your blackjack sessions without worrying about losing too much money or feeling the urge to chase losses.

Managing Wins and Losses

No matter how skilled you become at blackjack, the game still involves a significant degree of luck. This means that wins and losses are two inseparable parts of the game, and you��re bound to experience both. The key is knowing how to manage these highs and lows without letting them affect your bankroll.

The best way to manage wins and losses is to always have a long-term focus and set realistic goals you can target. Don��t let emotions guide your bets when experiencing hot and cold streaks. Always play with a clear head. Don��t allow winning streaks to make you overconfident and reckless. In the same breath, don��t get disheartened by losses and bet when you��re not composed.

Using Betting Systems Wisely

Blackjack betting systems can be a great way to ensure a systematic approach to wagering and aid in bankroll control. That is if you pick the right betting system for your bankroll and betting preferences.

There are many different betting systems you can choose from like Martingale, Fibonacci, Paroli, and others. Make sure you pick a betting system that works for you and use it wisely, but remember that even this methodical strategy won��t guarantee you wins.

Blackjack Tips: Common Blackjack Mistakes to Avoid

Since blackjack involves a skill element, it��s also possible to make mistakes that can cost you money and hinder your long-term success. Here are the most common ones beginner blackjack players make:

  • Missplaying Soft Hands – Soft hands are less likely to bust out, which causes many players, especially beginners, to often play them more recklessly. In this regard, while soft hands provide more freedom in decision-making, be careful not to misplay them and always stick to the basic blackjack strategy.

  • Ignoring Table Rules and Conditions – Playing blackjack without a complete understanding of all the rules and conditions increases your chances of making mistakes. If you��re playing online, rules are most often transparently outlined in the game info. If you��re playing in a brick-and-mortar venue, don��t hesitate to ask the dealer to explain any rule or condition you��re unsure about.

  • Over-betting and Chasing Losses – When over-betting, you��re needlessly straining your blackjack bankroll by placing larger wagers than you can afford. Moreover, if this leads to a bad run and your bankroll drains quickly, you might feel the need to chase losses. Both of these common mistakes will most often result in money loss, so you should be mindful of them and try to avoid making them.
image for blackjack tips

Image credit: Netfalls Remy Musser/Shutterstock

Blackjack Tips: Blackjack Etiquette and Best Practices

In addition to knowing helpful blackjack tips and tricks, it��s also good to know some basic etiquette and best practices you should be mindful of when at the blackjack table.

If you��re mainly playing online blackjack, you can apply some of these tips, but they primarily pertain to live casino blackjack games in brick-and-mortar venues.

Interacting with the Dealer and Other Players

Blackjack falls in the middle of the road when comparing the social aspect of casino games. It��s not as social as craps, but there is still some social aspect and interaction between participants.

With that in mind, you shouldn��t feel obligated to engage in small talk with the dealer or other players if you want to be silent and play. On the other hand, it��s completely normal to chat with others and have gambling and non-gambling conversations if they��re interested in engaging with you in this way.

Tips on Tipping

In land-based casinos, especially in the US, it��s customary to tip the dealer when you win. If you��re playing at the lowest stakes, it��s understandable not to tip, as any tip could have a noticeable impact on your EV. That said, even for bets of $5 or $10 per hand, tipping a couple of bucks after a few consecutive wins is common practice.

For players wagering at $20 minimum bet blackjack tables or higher, a customary tip is $5 to $10 or a percentage of a win. When it comes to the latter, this can be anywhere from two to five percent.

Maintaining Composure

Maintaining your composure is one of the most important pieces of blackjack etiquette, particularly when you��re playing in a land-based casino. Understanding and controlling your emotions is essential, as failing to do so can negatively affect your session and ruin the gambling experience for others at the table.

Always be courteous and respectful toward the dealer and other players. Even if you��re experiencing a losing streak, try to stay calm and not let this cause you to act impolitely or unpleasantly toward others.

image for blackjack tips

Image credit: Netfalls Remy Musser/Shutterstock

Blackjack Tips: Answering Popular Blackjack Questions

What is the Best Strategy for Blackjack?

The best blackjack strategy is outlined in a blackjack chart, which tells you exactly what move to make based on your card total and the dealer��s upcard. A blackjack strategy chart will help you make the optimal decision every time, and you can even use it when playing blackjack in land-based casinos.

How to Consistently Win at Blackjack?

If you��re looking for tips on how to win blackjack every time, it��s essential to know that there��s no way to guarantee winning when playing this card game. That said, to maximize your long-term winning chances, make sure you understand the fundamentals, practice with free blackjack, use a blackjack chart, and manage your bankroll carefully.

Is There Any Trick to Blackjack?

Blackjack is a very straightforward game, although there are a few tips you can keep in mind to play it more proficiently. Some of the basics include always standing when your hand is 12-16 and the dealer is showing 2-6. Additionally, you should always split Aces and 8s and never split 10s and 5s.

What is the 777 Rule in Blackjack?

The 777 rule in Blazing 7s Blackjack is that you win if one of your first two cards is a 7. Additionally, the payout is more generous if both of your cards are 7s and if the dealer is also showing a 7 as their upcard.

]]>
Understanding Sweepstakes Casinos: A Comprehensive Guide https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/sweepstakes-casinos/ Mon, 02 Sep 2024 10:27:55 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=41759 What Are Sweepstakes Casinos? What You Need to Know
  • A sweepstakes casino is a unique online gambling platform that offers casino-style games under US sweepstakes laws, providing an alternative for players in regions with restrictive online gambling laws.
  • Instead of using real currency, a sweepstakes casino offers games using virtual currency or “sweeps coins” that can’t be purchased directly but are given as a casino bonus when buying play money or obtained for free through other methods.
  • After acquiring and using these sweeps coins to play games, players can redeem them for real cash.
  • Popular sweepstakes casino games often include slots, poker, and table games similar to those in traditional online casinos.
  • Despite appearing like online gambling, sweepstakes casinos operate within a legal grey area by technically promoting sweepstakes rather than gambling, making them accessible to a broader range of players across the US.

What are sweepstakes casinos? you might well ask. How are sweepstakes casinos different from traditional casinos? How do these special online casinos work?  You��re in luck again. You have questions, we have answers. You need only read on and you��ll be playing your favorite online games for real cash and prizes before you know it.

Two Models: Gambling versus Sweepstakes

Gambling has a specific legal definition in the United States; it means a person is risking money in hopes of some kind of return that will be determined by the outcome of a contest of skill or game of chance. Any activities that fall under this definition �C like sports betting or casino games – are highly regulated under U.S. federal and state laws.

Sweepstakes casinos take advantage of a legal carveout most states make for random giveaways such as raffles, drawings, and �C you guessed it �C sweepstakes.  A sweepstakes casino avoids the legal definition of gambling by fulfilling two conditions.

  • The games look and play the same as they would at a traditional casino, but players don��t win money directly as a result of the outcome of the game.
  • Sweeps casinos don��t require an initial purchase or deposit as a condition of winning cash or prizes.

Sweepstakes Casinos: An Alternative to Online Gambling

The best sweeps casinos thread this legal needle to offer a realistic online casino experience that approaches �C but doesn��t cross – the threshold of gambling. Sweepstakes casinos look like other online gaming environments, with hundreds of slots options, video poker, and your favorite casino table games. And best of all, sweepstakes casinos pay out millions in cash and prizes to players just like a traditional online casino.

If you enjoy playing online casino games with real money at stake, but don��t live in a state with legal online gambling, a sweepstakes casino just might be what you��re looking for.

The best sweepstakes casinos provide the same level of richness and diversity of play as a traditional online casino, and they do it in a consistent, secure, high performance environment. Best of all, sweeps casinos are legal in almost every U.S. state, so you won��t have to cross state lines to get the action you crave.

casino image for sweepstakes casinos

Image Credit: Shutterstock AI

How Does a Sweepstakes Casino Work?

In a normal online casino or sports book, a player maintains a real money account balance that funds their wagers and can be withdrawn at any time. To stay on the right side of the law, sweeps casinos create a layer between real money and gameplay in the form of one or more virtual currencies.

Instead of a dollar-for-dollar trade in a traditional casino a sweepstakes casino currency has a specific role and denomination, and more important, it has no direct cash value and can��t be withdrawn.

When you sign up at a sweeps casino, your account is automatically issued a certain amount of gameplay currency, commonly called Gold Coins. You can use your Gold Coins to play a hand of Blackjack or take a spin with a slot game.

Your Gold Coin balance will rise and fall depending on the outcome of your gameplay, but these coins can��t be turned directly into cash. And while you��re issued some Gold Coins just for signing up, you��ll be strongly encouraged to purchase more Gold Coins so you can play longer.

Coins Means Prizes

So how to people win real cash and prizes if you can��t cash your Gold Coins in for money? There is a second currency, known generally as Sweepstakes Coins, that get issued in the form of bonuses and prizes. Again, these coins are not given out as a direct result of your bets. But of course, the longer you play, the more likely it is that you��ll be issued Sweepstakes Coins. ?

When you accumulate enough Sweepstakes Coins, the sweeps casino will give you an opportunity to trade these coins in for cash rewards and cash-equivalent prizes (such as branded gift cards). It��s a little more complicated than a traditional online casino, but you��ll get the hang of it quickly.

Why Play at a Sweepstakes Casino?

Casino gambling is legal in a little over half of the 50 U.S. States, but online gaming is offered in fewer than ten of those states, severely limiting online gambling options for much of the country. But given the legal carveout for sweepstakes and raffles, sweepstakes casinos can legally offer an online casino experience in nearly every state.

You might be concerned that sweeps casino games would feel different somehow. In fact, the games on offer at sweeps casinos are built by the same expert software vendors that design and market the most popular online slots and table games. You can expect the same level of variety and interactivity that you would in a traditional cash casino.

And there��s more good news for sweepstakes casino players. Because the gameplay model is a often unfamiliar to gamblers, sweeps casinos often go out of their way to entice customers to sign up and continue playing. You can expect sign-up bonuses, deposit bonuses, regular gameplay rewards. Plus there are contests, competitive ladders, and a variety of other giveaways and special prizes.

casino image for sweepstakes casinos

Image Credit: Shutterstock AI

Know the Game, Know Yourself

While it��s not traditional online gambling, sweeps casinos have some of the same elements of traditional casinos that you should be aware of.

  • Do your research before opening an account with a sweepstakes casino. Look for established brands that have a traceable reputation online. Get recommendations from trusted sites to find out which sweeps casinos are the most reliable and secure, as well as which ones offer the best customer perks and bonuses.

  • As you would with any other online casino, check the rules carefully before making a deposit. Make sure you qualify to win cash and prizes. Keep in mind that some sweeps casinos won��t tell you in advance that you happen to be disqualified from earning cash and prizes due to your location or some other restriction. Where a traditional casino would identify you as not illegible to play and therefore prevent you from even making a deposit, sweeps casinos are different.

    Because the gameplay currency has no direct cash equivalence, sweeps casinos might let you purchase Gold Coins, then only later inform you that you��re not eligible to earn Sweepstake Coins, or not eligible to convert your Sweepstakes Coins into cash or prizes. Most U.S. customer are eligible to participate fully, but there are exceptions, so read the rules and ask questions before making any purchase.

  • Before issuing a prize, most sweepstakes casinos require players to submit certain documentation to verify your identity and state of residence. As with the previous point, make sure you meet the casino��s qualifications for winning cash and prizes prior to making a deposit.

  • Promotions and bonuses are built to entice customers to play at sweeps casinos. But they��re also monitored carefully; any unusual activity connected to your account (such as making a duplicate account to take double advantage of a sign-up bonus) will often disqualify you from winning cash or prizes.

  • Not all states in the U.S. have legal carve-outs for sweeps casinos. Montana, Nevada, Idaho, and Washington are known to have the tightest anti-gambling restrictions. But whether you live in one of these states or not, check the rules to make sure you��re eligible to win cash or prizes.

  • As always, play responsibly and play within your means. While the sweeps model varies from the regular gameplay model of gambling, you should take it seriously. Only deposit and play with money you can afford to lose, and if you��ve gotten into personal or financial trouble in the past as a result of gambling, it probably makes sense to avoid sweepstakes (and any other) casinos.
casino image for sweepstakes casinos

Image Credit: Shutterstock AI

Sweepstakes Casinos: A Legal Alternative to Online Gambling

If you��re not able to play legally at an online casino in your state, sweepstakes casinos are a great way to enjoy the fun and excitement of slots and table games that match the biggest online casinos in terms of variety, quality, and gameplay.

Sweepstakes casinos pay out cash and prizes like a real casino, albeit through their unique multi-currency model rather than by direct gameplay results.  Like any online gaming, the more research you do on the best sweeps casinos, the better.

Sweepstakes Casinos: Frequently Asked Questions

What are sweeps casinos? These are online apps that offer casino games where players win real cash and prizes via a sweepstakes model, making them legal in many US states that otherwise don��t allow online gambling.

What types of games are offered sweeps casinos? Hundreds of slot and table games are available of similar quality and variety that you��d encounter in any licensed online casino.

How do you get started with a sweepstakes casino? Like a regular online casino, you��ll have to open an account and fill out the normal online paperwork.  

Do I have to make a deposit before I can play? No. Creating an account is free, and you��ll get issued a small number of gameplay coins just for opening an account. What makes sweeps casinos able to operate in most states is that you can play and win without ever making a deposit. Of course, once your free coins are exhausted, you��ll have the option to purchase more gameplay coins via services like Paypal or with Bitcoin or Ethereum.

Are these apps legitimate and fair? Always do your research into the most advantageous and reliable sweeps casinos, but yes, the established sweeps casinos use the same gaming software and Random Number Generators (RNG) as normal online casinos, ensuring fair and unbiased game outcomes.

Is my information safe? Again, established sweeps casinos operate with the same standards of privacy and information security as regular online casinos, using the most modern cryptographic standards.

Can I play on mobile devices? Most sweeps casinos offer games optimized for mobile use.

Do sweepstakes casinos offer bonuses and promotions? Yes, most sweeps casinos offer regular welcome bonuses, frequent player rewards, and referral bonuses, along with tournaments, leaderboards, and other promotions.

Can I play for real money at sweeps casinos? You can win cash and cash-equivalent prizes. But unlike normal casinos, you don��t win money directly as a result of the games you play. You can win money via the sweepstakes model.

Title Image Credit: Shutterstock AI

]]>
Blackjack Payouts: Getting The Biggest Bang For Your Buck https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/blackjack-payouts/ Thu, 29 Aug 2024 09:40:09 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=41644 Blackjack Payouts: What You Need to Know
  • Blackjack payouts refer to the amount a player wins from a successful hand, often presented as a ratio like 3:2 or 6:5.
  • The standard blackjack payout for a natural 21, also known as a blackjack, is typically 3:2. This means a $10 bet would result in a $15 win.
  • Some casinos may have tables with a lower blackjack payout of 6:5, which decreases player returns and increases the house edge.
  • Other blackjack winning hands typically have a 1:1 payout, meaning if you bet $10 and win, you receive $10 plus your original bet back.
  • Understanding blackjack payouts and their impact on your overall blackjack strategy and game value is critical to successful blackjack play.

Blackjack is one of the most popular and exciting casino games in the world, with billions staked worldwide every year. It is therefore important that you get the best value and seek the games that pay out the most when you win.

The good news is that blackjack payouts are much higher than other casino games �C provided you make the right plays. And you can make a huge amount of money if you play well.

Blackjack Payouts: How Are They Defined?

The RTP, or return to player, will be declared by most reputable casinos. You will find it under the help button for the game. The RTP is the amount that you would expect to get back for each pound, dollar or euro that you stake. The typical industry average for blackjack is 99.5% which is much higher than for slots or roulette.

The normal blackjack payout for a winning bet is 1:1. However, all casinos offer you the chance to double your stake when you have certain blackjack hands, always 9, 10 or 11 and often any two cards. If you win, you then get paid even money on the doubled stake, so still 1:1.

However, you only get one extra card, so you should only double when the basic blackjack strategy charts tell you to do so. But if you lose, you lose the doubled stake. Blackjack, which is an ace with any of a ten, jack, queen or king, invariably pays 3:2. So if you win, you get 1.5x?times your stake. If you stake ��2 or $2, you would win an extra ��3 or $3.

Image credit: Swazall/Shutterstock

Top Tip: Always Check the Blackjack Payouts

While most casinos offer 3:2 for blackjack, there are some that only pay 6:5. Naturally enough they do not advertise this on their front page, and you have to check the rules of the game to find this out.

Unless there is some reason such as a generous casino bonus to play a game that pays only 6:5 for blackjack, you should avoid those games. There are plenty that offer 3:2.

Blackjack Variations And How They Impact Payouts

American Blackjack

American blackjack differs from European blackjack because the dealer peeks when she has a ten face up to check for blackjack before any play.

If an ace is face up, insurance is offered, a bet that the dealer has a ten, paid at 2-1. You can split a pair of the same rank, usually up to four hands depending on house rules. The RTP is usually around 99.6%

European Blackjack Payouts

European blackjack is a little different. There is usually no hole card, or if there is, the dealer does not check for blackjack when she has a ten, so you can lose to a blackjack after you have doubled or split. This means that basic strategy changes.

Also the dealer stands on soft 17 which is an ace and a six, or an ace with any number of cards totaling six. Usually only two hands are allowed, so you cannot re-split if you get another pair. The blackjack payout is slightly less, around 99.5% depending on specific rules.

Progressive Blackjack Payouts

This is a side bet, rather than a separate game. You make a separate bet on the first four cards, your two and the dealer��s two.  It is usually played with six decks, but four and eight are common. You get paid out on the number of aces in those four cards, with the jackpot, which increases until it is won, paid out on four aces of the same color.

The RTP varies with the size of the jackpot. If the jackpot is low, the RTP is a paltry 45% up to the largest I have seen at 60%. That was when the jackpot in New York New York Casino was over $100,000. For the player to have an advantage on this bet, the jackpot would need to be about $2,500,000.

Spanish 21 Blackjack Payouts

Spanish 21, called Pontoon in Malaysia and Australia, the four tens are removed, but otherwise normal blackjack rules apply. There are lots of  ��extras�� such as bonuses for 678 and 777. Also the rules (apart from the tens being removed) are favorable in that you can double on any number of cards, and late surrender, for example. The RTP is 99.6% to about 99.2% depending on which of the many rules apply.

Image credit: Swazall/Shutterstock

Push 22 Variants

Push 22 Blackjack is a variant of blackjack in which if the dealer busts with a point total of 22, it results in a “push” rather than a win for the player. A “push” means all remaining player wagers on the table are returned as a draw, except for player blackjacks which are still paid. This specific rule significantly increases the house edge and changes the optimal strategy compared to traditional blackjack.

Blackjack Switch

This wonderful game was invented by blackjack (and backgammon) guru Geoff Hall. You play two hands and can swap the top card of each hand. That sounds like a great deal.

If you have T5 on one hand and 6J on the other hand, you would swap and now have 11 and 20, and you can double down on the 11 as well. It comes at a price, of course, and if the dealer gets 22, it will be a push against all hands which have not bust except blackjack. The expected blackjack payout is 99.4%.

Free Bet Blackjack

Another game invented by Geoff Hall which appears in US casinos and increasingly online. The player can get a free double, where he does not have to double his stake, and a free split, where he does not have to add a second stake. However, the dealer again pushes against all hands except blackjack that are still on the table when she has 22.

The return to the player is 98.9%, so this is less attractive than normal blackjack, but sometimes the game in the player��s favor when the chance of the dealer getting 22 drops, but that requires a computer to calculate.

Power Blackjack

There seem to be two version of this game, using the word power. The American version has a game where one can double and change the card he or she gets if desired.

Also one can split on any two cards, doubling the stake. The quid pro quo for the house is that if the dealer gets 22, it is a push against any hand still on the table other than blackjack.

Lightning Blackjack

This is best avoided as the correct play is often counterintuitive, with doubling down on hard totals common. The final totals 18, 19, 20, 21 and BJ get multipliers which increase your winnings by varying amounts, up to 25 times, provided you have the winning hand.  

The game states a return of 99.2% which is about right, but only with perfect play. If you don��t know the unusual actions, you will lose heavily.

Image credit: Swazall/Shutterstock

Finding The Best Returns and Blackjack Payouts

The best games depend on whether you want to play every hand, or are prepared to sit and twiddle your thumbs. The former is the single deck, multi-player game. Microgaming claim that the return to player is 99.69%.

Playing perfectly, one might even do better than that and I think the figure is nearer 99.8%. However, playing basic strategy it is about 99.5%. The game is shuffled after every hand, so there is no need to count!

Top Tip: Blackjack Insurance Can be The Right Move

The insurance bet, always of half your stake, is a bet that the dealer has Blackjack when she has an ace showing. Other sites have said ��Never take insurance��, but this is wrong. Certainly it is wrong for a single-deck game.

If two of the 11 cards you can see at the start  are tens, then the insurance bet has a return of 102.4% and should be taken. The advantage for the player is greater if only one or no tens are visible. The insurance bet is often favorite in shoe games as well when the deck is replete with tens.

The Effect of Rule Changes on a Blackjack Payout

Changes in the rules affect the payout expectancy. The most common rules are probably the following, common with Evolution, Playtech and Pragmatic Play, the main providers: Evolution have six-card Charlie and Playtech has double after split.

Typical Rules in Blackjack

  • Eight Decks
  • Dealer does not check for Blackjack with a ten
  • Dealer Stands on Soft 17
  • Only One card to Split Aces
  • No Double after Split
  • Double on any two cards
  • Split to two hands only
  • One card to each hand on split aces
  • Six-Card Charlie

The RTP using the above rules is 99.50% with perfect play on a single seat with shuffling after every hand, which is usual for RNG (random number generated) games. Without the Six-Card Charlie, which means you always win if you have six cards without busting, it would be 99.29%.  The effect of reducing the number of decks from eight is as follows:

  • Single Deck       +0.51%
  • Double Deck     +0.21%
  • Four Decks        +0.05%
  • Six Decks           +0.02%

The effect of other rule changes is a bit less. Late surrender, which means that you can get half your stake back if you think you are going to lose, but only after the dealer has checked for Blackjack, is worth about 0.09%. I have not seen early surrender, which means that you can surrender if the dealer has a ten or ace showing, for quite a while, but it would be worth a whopping 0.62%!

In general, single deck games compensate by allowing a double only on 9-11 (-0.09%) and Dealer hitting soft 17 (-0.22%).  But they are still better than the multi-deck games.

Image credit: Swazall/Shutterstock

Blackjack Payouts in Shoe Games

Most Blackjack players know how to keep a running count of the number of high cards and number of low cards, the so-called hi-lo count. The aces, kings, queens, jacks and tens score -1 and the sixes, fives, fours, threes and twos score +1. The total count is divided by the number of decks remaining to give a true count. When that is greater than 1, the player has a small edge.

There are games where one does not need to play every hand, typically One Blackjack or Infinite Blackjack, which have an unlimited number of player at the table. If you play only when the count is >+1 and play perfectly you should come out ahead.

However, the casino is not stupid and, particularly in Las Vegas, they ask you to leave, or close your account online. if you are betting a significant amount, especially if you bet a large amount at counts above +5, and play perfectly!

The above was generated by my program playing perfectly over millions of hands.

Different Side Bets And Their Payouts

These are usually bad. I say usually but that does not mean we should never place them. There is a tendency among social players to bet because they have attractive amounts paid out. But they usually have a poor percentage return. They should generally only be tried with a shoe game where the number of each card fluctuates dramatically.  Let us look at some of them:

Perfect Pairs (Any pair)

This popular side bet typically pays 8-1 on the first two cards for the player being a pair, and 25-1 if they are a suited pair. The payouts vary slightly but average 95.9%.

Hot 3 (Lucky Lucky)

This is a bet on the total of the player��s two cards and dealer��s up card being equal to 19,20 or 21. There is a payout of 100-1 for 777. There is rarely an advantage for the player. The RTP is 94.6%. Lucky Lucky is a version of this with higher payouts for 777 suited, usually with six decks and a payout of around 95.3%.

21+3

The 21+3 bet on three-card poker hands for the first two cards of the player and the dealer upcard. It pays a best 100-1 for Suited Trips and again there is rarely an advantage for the player. The RTP is 96.3% so a slightly better bet than the Hot 3.

Bust It (or Buster)

This is a bet that the dealer will bust, and pays more when the dealer busts with more than three cards.  The top payout on some sites for the dealer busting with eight cards is 250-1, but some sites couple the bust with the player Blackjack and pay 5000-1.

It is very hard to calculate the chance of the dealer busting, and the return on this bet is 94.12%. If there are lots of aces, twos and threes in the deck, the chance of a bust with many cards goes up, and the bet can then be favorable.

Crazy Sevens

This is a bet on the first three cards being sevens. If the first one is a seven, you win, and you win more if the first two are both sevens, but the real payout comes from 777 suited, which pays 2000-1. This sometimes has a player advantage when there are few sevens so far in the shoe, but you need to be counting sevens! The RTP is 94.3%.

Maximize Your Blackjack RTP

Your first decision is whether to play a shoe game, when you will need to count and either to vary your bet or sit out to make money, or to play a continuous shuffling game.  If you vary your bet significantly you might hit a bad run and lose heavily. Playing for flat stakes on a single-deck game is the safer option, and the return of 99.8% is close to level.

You will often get loyalty points or free ��10 or $10 bets as well. Those will dry up, however if you are level on your main bets. Whatever you do, make sure that you play when Blackjack is paid at 3:2 (or better if ��I should be so lucky��, as Kylie sang).

]]>
What is a 4 Bet in Poker? A Beginner’s Poker Betting Guide https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/what-is-a-4-bet-in-poker/ Wed, 28 Aug 2024 10:16:30 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=41471 What is a 4 Bet in Poker: What You Need to Know
  • A 4 bet in poker is an aggressive preflop betting move that can help you force other players to fold and claim the pot before the flop is dealt.
  • The 4 bet in poker is most commonly found in deep-stacked cash or online poker games, where the players will have a large enough chip stacks to sustain this kind of bet.
  • A 4 bet should be saved for your strongest poker hands, like pocket aces, where you are sure that a significant pre-flop bet is going to go your way.
  • The primary aim of a 4 bet in poker is to quickly force up the pot value when you’re dealt the ‘nuts’ while also forcing players with weaker hands to fold.

A 4-bet in poker is a raise that follows a 3-bet, and it is usually done before the flop. The first raise is also known as a 2-bet (although the term is rarely used). The next player raising this initial raise is making a 3-bet. Finally, if another player or the player who made the initial raise raises again, this move is called a 4-bet.

The 4-bet is a part of advanced poker strategy and not something most beginner players have in their arsenal. However, to be a winning player in the world of online gambling and move up the stakes, you need to understand the pros and cons of this aggressive move, when to use it, and how to structure it for the best results.

In this article, we��ll discuss many different aspects of a 4-bet in poker, cover what a 4 bet is, when to use it, and how it factors into your overall poker strategy.

What is a 4 Bet in Poker: The Basics

A 4-bet is primarily a preflop move, defined as a raise that follows a 3-bet. It can be done by the player making the original raise or any other player in a hand left to act after the 3-bet.

The 4-bet in poker is usually indicative of a lot of poker hand strength before the flop, signaling that the player is willing to play for their entire stack. Of course, when used correctly, this isn��t always the case, as good players will have some 4-bet bluffs in their arsenal.

Unlike 3-bet, which is a fairly common part of poker strategy, 4-bet isn��t nearly as present, largely due to the fact that many games, especially tournaments, aren��t played deep enough to warrant this move and allow players to use it and still have chips left behind.

A Poker 4 Bet Example

Let��s look at a typical poker tournament situation, similar to the WSOP, with about 60 big blinds effective. This example also applies to online games, like video poker or live dealer poker.

Player A raises to 2.5 big blinds, and the big blind player 3-bets to 9 big blinds.

Even if player A goes for a very small sizing and 4-bets to only 20 big blinds, if the big blind player calls, there will be 40 blinds in the pot, and both players will have a pot-sized bet left behind, not leaving much room for post-flop play.

For this reason, you��ll encounter a 4-bet much more frequently in deep-stacked cash games, where players have 100 or more big blinds to start a hand, allowing for much more maneuvering space.

image for article: what is a 4 bet in poker?

Image Credit: Kitreel/Shutterstock

When Should You Use a 4 Bet in Poker?

As one of the strongest preflop moves, a 4-bet should be used sparingly. First and foremost, you��ll almost always want to 4-bet with your absolute best poker hand, like pocket aces and pocket kings. These are the best starting hands in, for example, live dealer casino Hold ��Em, so your goal is always to get as much money into the pot preflop as possible.

Another good value 4-bet candidate is AK suited, as this is the strongest unpaired hand. However, when playing extremely deep (over 200 big blinds), many good players will play this hand as a call, although a lot will depend on the situation and the opponent they��re up against.

You can 4-bet your absolutely best hands against everyone. However, against very aggressive players, you can expand your 4-betting range to include other strong pocket pairs like Queens and Jacks, AQ suited, and AK off.

If you perceive your opponent��s 3-betting range as too wide, 4-betting with these hands is a +EV move, as you��ll be well ahead of them before the flop.

4 Bet Bluffing Considerations

When it comes to bluffing, there are a few things you need to consider:

  • Are you deep enough for a 4-bet bluff �C As we��ve already discussed, in some scenarios, a 4-bet will commit you to the pot, and if this is the case, you should not be bluffing.
  • Is your opponent 3-betting wide enough �C If they��re very tight and only 3-betting with the top of the range, it��ll be hard to come up with a profitable 4-bet bluffing range.
  • Are you comfortable playing a big pot on the flop and later streets �C When you 4-bet bluff and get called, you need to be comfortable with playing a big pot and potentially pulling some expensive bluffs by the river. If your only plan is to win the pot before the flop, you��re not ready to start 4-bet bluffing.

We��ll talk about a 4-bet as a bluffing tool in a minute, but these are some things to keep in mind when figuring out whether or not to go for it, whether for value or as a bluff.

What is 4 Bet in Poker: Common Mistakes & Pitfalls to Avoid

When it comes to poker 4-bets, there are a few common poker mistakes that players fall victim to, and while it may take some experience and practice to eliminate these, it can certainly be done.

The first and perhaps the most expensive one is misjudging the opponent��s 3-betting range. Some players are quick to read their opponents as too loose, leading to them expanding what they believe is a value 4-bet range against that opponent.

The fact of the matter is, if you want to expand beyond the hands we��ve just discussed, you��ll need to have a very specific reason and have a very good read on the particular opponent. If you have a lot of history with them and know they��re capable of 3-betting with absolute trash, then you can do it, but don��t be quick to make such determinations after playing just a few dozen hands against them.

4 Bet Poker Mistakes to Avoid

Some other common mistakes players make with their 4-bets are:

  • Using too big of a sizing �C When you 4-bet, you are already conveying a lot of strength. You don��t need to go huge unless there is a very specific reason for it (i.e., your opponent will call with a weak hand). Going about 2.2x the size of the 3-bet is usually more than enough to accomplish your goal while leaving you with enough chips behind to play on future streets when called.
  • 4-betting too small �C Even though you��re representing a big hand, you don��t want to just click back and allow your opponent to call with their entire range. Not only are you giving them great odds, but you��re also not doing anything to try and define their range if your bet size is such that they��ll call with 100% of the hands.
  • Failing to account for other players in the hand �C Before you 4-bet, especially when doing it as a bluff, you need to consider other players left to act. If there are players with short stacks behind you, you should be less inclined to bluff, as these players can easily move all in, forcing you to call with what stands to be an inferior hand.

4-Betting as a Bluffing Tool

Good players will use 4-bet bluffs as a part of their overall poker strategy, but to do so efficiently, you��ll need to develop a good understanding of this move and get a lot of experience playing against different types of players.

When it comes to 4-bet bluffing, there are two typical scenarios that come to mind:

  • Attacking players that you know 3-bet too wide
  • Attacking players 3-betting from later positions or from the blinds, where their ranges will naturally be wider

When you recognize one of these spots, you need to figure out what poker hands are good 4-bet bluff candidates. Generally speaking, like with 3-bets, these will mostly be hands containing blockers and having decent potential to flop big, such as small suited pocket aces (A2s �C A5s).

To balance this out and make yourself less predictable, you��ll also want to include some other hands into your bluffing range. While there is a lot of theory behind this, some good candidates are middling-suited connectors like 78s or 89s.

These hands have good board coverage and can catch opponents off-guard, as they��ll have a hard time putting you on these types of hands in a 4-bet pot when a board comes favorable for you.

image for article: what is a 4 bet in poker?

Image Credit: VITALII BORKOVSKYI/Shutterstock

Value Betting Using 4-Bets

We��ve already discussed that 4-bets are primarily used as a value-betting tool. When you have a big hand before the flop, 4-bet is one of the best ways to get more money into the pot, and you shouldn��t shy away from using it to achieve this very goal.

Some hands are standard 4-bets for value almost regardless of the situation, namely:

  • AA, KK, QQ, Aks, AKo (frequently)

When you have one of these hands, you generally don��t mind getting a lot of chips into the pot before the flop is dealt. In fact, save for rare scenarios where stacks are extremely deep, these are the hands that you want to play for stacks against most opponents.

When figuring out what sizing to use, you��ll probably want to use a bigger 4-bet size with hands like AK and QQ and perhaps go smaller with AA and KK. This is simply because the latter is easier to play after the flop, and you will find more favorable boards with aces and kings.

Advanced 4-Betting Tactics

As you start incorporating more 4-bets into your play, you��ll realize there are many aspects to this part of poker strategy that aren��t covered in this article. This is because 4-bet is, by definition, a high variance move, which means you��ll end up playing more big pots.

Once you get the preflop part somewhat solved and figured out, you��ll need to dig into different post-flop aspects, figuring out when to continue with the aggression and what boards warrant checking and exercising some pot control. This can be tricky, as the natural tendency in 4-bet pots is to keep betting.

There is also a lot of meta game that goes into figuring out your 4-bet strategy, especially as you move up the stakes and encounter stronger players. What used to work at lower limits will no longer work, as these players will go beyond the fit or fold approach, even in 4-bet pots.

This shouldn��t scare you away from using 4-bets as a powerful tool that they are. With time, practice, and experience, you��ll become much better at all these different aspects, and any mistakes you make along the way are just a natural part of the learning process.

Title Image Credit: Anton27/Shutterstock

]]>
What is Punto Banco? Your Guide to This Amazing Baccarat Variation https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/punto-banco-card-game/ Tue, 27 Aug 2024 11:10:08 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=41485 What is The Punto Banco Card Game? What You Need to Know!
  • Punto Banco is the most common variation of Baccarat card game.
  • The rules are clear and easy to learn, making it a great entry game for Baccarat beginners.
  • The goal of the game is to end with a card value of as close to 9 as possible.
  • If the value of your cards hits double digits, only the last digit in the total is counted as the hand value.
  • Compared to Chemin de Fer and Baccarat Banque, Punto Banco has stricter rules on when the player and banker can draw a third card.

The Punto Banco card game is one of the three main variations of the Baccarat card game that are found at an online casino. It is the best-known and most-played version which is actually very straightforward and easy to learn.

This guide will cover everything you need to know about this exciting Punto Banco Baccarat game. From basic online gambling strategies and rules to more advanced tips and mistakes you should watch out for, this comprehensive guide outlines it all.

Keep reading to learn Punto Banco in just a few minutes!

Understanding Baccarat Punto Banco

Punto Banco is one of the four main baccarat variations, along with Chemin de Fer, Baccarat Banque, and Mini Baccarat.

Like the other variations, Baccarat Punto Banco is a card game comparing the strength of different cards with three possible outcomes:

  • The Player winning the hand
  • The Banker winning the hand
  • A tie if both the Banker and the Players have the same total of points

By comparing Punto Banco vs Baccarat Banque and Chemin de Fer, we can also notice some differences between them. In the latter two variations, players can make choices and have a direct impact on the end result.

In Punto Banco, there are fixed drawing rules, meaning that the players don��t have any impact on the gameplay. The game is played with either six or eight decks.

Punto Banco Scoring

The goal of the game is to get 9 points in your hand or as close to it as possible. The Aces are worth one point, all face cards are worth ten points, and numbers have their face value.

Before the hand starts, you can bet on the Dealer or Player winning or on the tie.

Playing and Betting in Punto Banco

To help you be certain how a Punto Banco round should play out, let��s go over a quick step-by-step example:

  1. The Players Place their Bets – Every player at the table chooses their bet. Once everyone who wants to participate has made the wager, the dealer will burn the top card and deal two cards to the Player and two cards to the Banker’s hand.
  2. Comparing Hands – The Dealer compares the Player’s and Banker’s hands to see which hand has a total closer to 9. When comparing the two hands, the card totals in each hand are added. If a hand has a total of 10 or higher, the last digit in the total is counted as the hand value. For instance, if the Player’s hand is worth 15, it��s subtracted by 10, and the total is 5.
  3. The Dealer Pays Out the Winners – If you bet on the Punto (the player), you will get an even-money 1:1 payout. If you bet on Banco (the banker) and win, you will get a 19:20 payout. This is also an even-money payout minus the 5% house commission. A winning bet on a tie will get you an 8:1 payout.

Punto Banco Card Drawing Rules

Baccarat Punto Banco also has precise third-card drawing rules. For the player, this includes drawing if their total is 5 or less. If they have a 6 or 7 total, they stand. For the banker, the rules are a bit more extensive:

  • Banker stands if they have a total of 7.
  • If the banker has a total of 6, they draw if the player��s third card is a 6 or 7.
  • If the banker has a total of 5, they draw if the player��s third card is a 4, 5, 6, or 7.
  • If the banker has a total of 4, they draw if the player��s third card is a 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7.
  • If the banker has a total of 3, they draw unless the player��s third card is an 8.
  • Banker draws if they have a total of 2 or less.
image for Punto Banco card game

Image credit: Shutterstock

Strategies for Winning And Punto Banco Odds

Since there aren��t any variables gameplay-wise, Punto Banco baccarat strategies are simple to follow. Primarily, the Banker bet is the best one to prioritize, followed by the Player bet. Due to its high house edge and low probability, the Tie bet is best avoided.

With this in mind, also consider that different bets will come with different house edge percentages. For example, the house edge on the Player bet is 1.24%, while on the Banker bet is just 1.06%. On the other hand, the Tie bet comes with a whopping house edge of over 14%.

Balancing Your Bankroll

Besides considering this, it��s wise to set a fixed bankroll before you start playing. There��s no precise amount you should have, but the general rule of thumb is to have a total bankroll of at least 100 to 200 times the size of your average bet. Having a decent bankroll that you��re comfortable risking will put you in the best position to focus on the game without worrying about losing too much money.

Although the Punto Banco card game is very simple, you can implement various techniques for a more systematic approach to maximize your winning chances. Primarily, this includes utilizing a betting system that will optimize your bets.

Additionally, you can try capitalizing on successful streaks and minimizing the impact of losses. With that in mind, don��t try to chase patterns or overanalyze them since all of it is purely random, but this can add some fun to the game.

Common Mistakes to Avoid in The Punto Banco Game

In addition to using various strategies to optimize your results when playing Baccarat Punto Banco, it��s also useful to be aware of the most common mistakes many players make. With that in mind, here are some potential pitfalls in Punto Banco you should watch for:

  • Not Understanding the Rules – Punto Banco casino rules are fairly straightforward to learn. That said, many players make the mistake of betting without fully understanding all of the game��s rules. Make sure you understand the odds and payout percentages, especially if you want to explore some of the game��s many side bets.
  • Choosing Bets With Poor Punto Banco Odds – In line with the previous mistake, the types of bets you place will directly impact your results. For most players who want to steer towards the maximum chance of winning, the simplest Punto Banco bets, such as the Banker and the Player bet, are the best ones to stick with.
  • Betting Impulsively – This baccarat variation is exciting, and it can be easy to get carried away and play impulsively. This is why it��s crucial to always play with a clear head and not let your emotions interfere in your decision-making process when making bets.

Advanced Techniques and Approaches For Punto Banco

As you master the basics of the Punto Banco card game, you might want to explore advanced Baccarat strategies that will allow you to take a more hands-on betting approach. This primarily pertains to finding the best betting system based on your personal preferences.

There are many betting systems to choose from, so it��s essential to pick the one that works best for you. In short, advanced betting systems can be divided into two main groups.

Punto Banco Card Game Betting Systems

The first is positive progression systems, which involve increasing your wager after a win. A few examples of such betting systems are the Paroli system and the 1-3-2-6 system.

The second is negative progression systems, which dictate increasing wagers after losses. These include systems such as the Martingale, Fibonacci, D��Alembert, and Labouchere systems.

On a different note, a popular advantage technique like counting cards won��t be very effective in baccarat, especially with the Punto Banco game variation. Unlike blackjack, Punto Banco will produce very linear results, meaning that there aren��t any cards that can significantly sway the outcome in the player��s or banker��s favor.

For this reason, counting cards can theoretically produce a small advantage compared to not doing so, but not substantial enough to deliver significantly higher profitability as it can do in blackjack.

image for Punto Banco card game

Image credit: Shutterstock

FAQ Section

1. What sets Punto Banco apart from other Baccarat variations?

The main difference that separates Punto Banco from Chemin de fer and Baccarat Banque is that in the latter two variations, players can make choices during the game. In the Punto Banco casino game, this feature is absent, as the players�� moves are controlled by the cards they get dealt.

2. How can players increase their chances of success in Punto Banco?

The best way to increase your winning chances in Punto Banco is to stick with simple bets with good Punto Banco odds, such as the Player and Banker bets. Additionally, setting an objective and having a bankroll will help you play responsibly and make the most of your money.

3. Is card counting effective in Punto Banco?

No, card counting isn��t very effective in Punto Banco. Due to the game��s rules, the edge you would get by counting cards in Punto Banco is negligible. It��s better to focus on other advanced betting techniques that will help you increase your profitability.

4. Are there any specific rules or customs unique to Punto Banco?

In Punto Banco, the casino banks at all times and there are fixed drawing rules. Moreover, while the Player and Banker designations are still present, players can��t make any drawing choices, so the game is entirely chance-based.

5. How can players practice and improve their skills in Punto Banco?

After learning how to play baccarat, players can practice free baccarat online. This is the best way to improve their skills before playing it at a real money casino, as many online casinos offer the game in demo mode.

6. What are common misconceptions about Punto Banco that players should be aware of?

The most common misconception is that Punto Banco is a complex game and that it��s difficult to learn, which is far from the truth. Another popular myth surrounding casino Punto Banco is that it��s primarily for high rollers. While this was correct centuries ago when it was invented, it isn��t true today.

A Deep Dive into the Strategic Game of Punto Banco

Punto Banco is undoubtedly a glamorous and exciting game that will leave you feeling like James Bond, especially if you play it in the thrilling atmosphere of a live casino venue. Better yet, it��s a very easy game to jump into and you can already start playing it after reading this guide.

Unlike the other two main baccarat variations, Chemin de fer and Baccarat Banque, this one doesn��t require any decision-making on the player��s part. This makes it easy to play with confidence even as a beginner, as everything is entirely luck-based.

With that in mind, make sure to remember the rules, tips, and strategies we shared with you in this article. Equally as important, be aware of the common mistakes, as this will help you ensure maximum profitability when playing Punto Banco.

Image credit: Kitreel/Shutterstock

]]>
What is Chemin de Fer Baccarat and How Do You Win at It? https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/what-is-chemin-de-fer/ Mon, 26 Aug 2024 15:27:11 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=41475 Chemin de Fer: What do You Need to Know?
  • Chemin de Fer baccarat is one of the oldest forms of baccarat still being played.
  • The aim of a round of Chemin de Fer object is to reach a total 9 with a hand of two or three cards.
  • When the card vales in Chemin de Fer baccarat reach double digits, the first digit is ignored. So the 1-9 numbered cards are worth their face value, while the the 10 and the face cards are worth zero. An ace is worth one.
  • Players bet against each other in a real money baccarat Chemin de Fer game, instead of against the dealer.
  • In the Chemin de Fer card game, the first two cards are dealt face-down, so the players don’t know which cards their opponent has.
  • Unlike standard baccarat, players take turns being the bank, with the dealer, who represents the casino, only being there to facilitate the game.
  • When the cards are revealed at the end of the round, the player with the highest total wins.

Chemin de Fer baccarat is one of the three main variations of the casino card game baccarat and is the oldest modern version played to this day. This baccarat variation shares many similarities with Punto Banco, Mini Baccarat and Baccarat Banque, but there are some differences you should know before you start playing.

Albeit not the most popular baccarat variation, Chemin de Fer is still a player favorite in many countries, especially in Europe and Latin America, and is a favorite among online baccarat players because of its quick pace.

This comprehensive Chemin de Fer guide covers everything you should know about this exciting and intriguing game.

Chemin de Fer Baccarat: Understanding The Basics

Although historians claim that the origins of baccarat date back to the 15th century, the earliest reliable information dates to 19th-century France, precisely the time and place where Chemin de Fer first emerged.

Chemin de Fer baccarat is the earliest two-person baccarat variation, as Baccarat Banque was invented as a three-person game, while Punto Banco came after.

Chemin de Fer in French stands for ��railway,�� referring to the fastest mode of transportation at the time. This is because the Chemin de Fer game was faster and more streamlined than similar previous versions.

Chemin de Fer rules differ from those of Punto Banco, the most popular online baccarat variation. The biggest and most significant difference is that Chemin de Fer involves a skill element. In Punto Banco, there are strict baccarat rules as to when the players can and cannot draw the third card. In Chemin de Fer, players are free to decide this on their own, meaning that their decisions directly influence the result.

Another difference that makes Chemin de Fer more complex than standard Punto Banco baccarat is that the cards are dealt face-down in this variation. This enhances the strategic element of the game, as players can��t see what the Banker��s card total is until the end of the round.

image for the chemin de fer article

Image Credit: Kitreel/Shutterstock

Playing, Betting, and Etiquette in a Chemin de Fer Game

Chemin de Fer has a very simple and easy-to-follow structure. That said, to make sure you understand how betting works in Chemin de Fer, here��s a quick step-by-step guide on how to play Chemin de Fer baccarat:

  1. Betting Round – Before the dealer distributes the cards, the players place their bets. This is where Chemin de Fer differs from standard baccarat. In this variation, players take turns as the Banker and play against each other instead of the house. The dealer, who represents the casino, is only there to facilitate the game and make sure everything is in order.
  2. Dealing the Cards and Drawing – The dealer will distribute two cards to the Banker and two cards to each player, all face-down. The dealer will then evaluate the totals, and the players will have the option of drawing the third card.
  3. Comparing Hands and Paying out Winners – Once all players have decided on their move, the dealer compares the final card totals. A Player hand that has a higher total than the Banker wins the bet. If the Banker’s hand is the highest-valued one, all players lose. If there��s a tie, the bets stand for the next hand.

Strategies for Winning at The Chemin de Fer Card Game

Apart from understanding how a typical Chemin de Fer baccarat round plays out, there are additional strategic considerations you should be mindful of to play more optimally. This primarily includes knowing when to hit and when to stand:

  • The optimal strategy is to accept a third card whenever you have a total of 0 to 4 and to never get a third card if you have a total of 6 or 7.
  • If you have a total of 5, you can decide either way, although most Chemin de Fer players opt for taking the third card in this situation.

In addition to the gameplay itself, your bankroll management strategy can also have a significant impact on your overall Chemin de Fer experience. It��s crucial to set a fixed bankroll for playing Chemin de Fer.

A simple rule of thumb is to have a bankroll anywhere from 100 to 200 times the size of your bets. In other words, if you��re betting $5 per round, you should have a bankroll of at least $500 to $1,000. You’ll also want to look for table stakes that fit your bankroll.

Common Mistakes to Avoid in a Chemin de Fer Baccarat Game

Just as it��s important to focus on optimal Chemin de Fer strategies, it is vital to be aware of the potentially costly mistakes that you��d want to avoid when playing this baccarat variation. With that in mind, we want to highlight a few of the most common mistakes Chemin de Fer baccarat players make:

  • Straying From Basic Baccarat Strategy – As we outlined above, Chemin de Fer has some general guidelines that help you know when to hit and when to stand. Diverging from this simple baccarat strategy is a mistake that will result in suboptimal returns over time.
  • Not Understanding Odds and Probabilities – A common mistake many beginner baccarat players make is not understanding the odds and probabilities of different bets. Knowing the relation of these two game elements is key to ensuring you make the most of your bankroll and avoid placing poor bets.
  • Chasing Wins – This mistake is particularly prevalent among beginner Chemin de Fer baccarat players. Expecting to win every hand after a prolonged losing streak or betting in hopes that fortune will turn in your favor can be one of the costliest mistakes when playing this card game. To avoid this, make sure to stick to the bankroll you set and know when to stop playing.

Advanced Techniques and Strategies

Advanced Chemin de Fer players might want to employ more sophisticated techniques that involve exploiting various patterns. When it comes to this, the two most popular advantage techniques are card counting and edge sorting.

When it comes to the latter, edge sorting can be a very effective strategy for getting an edge in Chemin de Fer. However, casinos frown upon this technique and will most likely ban you if you get caught.

On the other hand, unlike in blackjack, the house isn��t as strict when it comes to counting cards in Chemin de Fer. However, the reason for this is that card counting in Chemin de Fer isn��t very effective.

Even though Chemin de Fer players can choose when they want to take the third card, counting cards doesn��t provide any discernible edge. This is primarily because the number ten card and face cards are worth zero points, which diminishes the importance of knowing when they will be dealt.

image for the chemin de fer article

Image Credit: Clementinin/Shutterstock

Chemin de Fer Baccarat FAQ

1.   What is the Chemin de Fer meaning?

Chemin de Fer baccarat originated in 19th-century France. Translated from French, Chemin de Fer means ��railway�� or ��railroad,�� referring to the game��s sped-up gameplay compared to classic baccarat variations.

2.   How does Chemin de Fer differ from other Baccarat variations?

The main difference between Chemin de Fer and other standard baccarat versions like Punto Banco is the presence of a skill element. In Chemin de Fer, players can decide when they want to take the third card. This means that they have direct input on the outcome and don��t have to play according to strict drawing rules.

3.   Is there a strategy to consistently winning at Chemin de Fer Baccarat?

The smartest way to play the game is to use a Chemin de Fer betting system, have a dedicated gambling bankroll, and focus on betting on the Banker or the Player. That said, Chemin de Fer baccarat still involves a significant degree of luck, so no Chemin de Fer strategy is guaranteed to provide consistent profits.

4.   What are the betting limits typically associated with Chemin de Fer?

The Chemin de Fer betting limits primarily depend on the table you��re playing at. In online Chemin de Fer, this can be as low as $1 per bet. On the other end of the scale, the maximum betting limit in live casino venues and online live dealer baccarat can be several hundred dollars or more per hand with additional baccarat side bets.

5.   How can players practice and improve their skills in Chemin de Fer Baccarat?

The best way to practice Chemin de Fer is to play free baccarat online. Most online casinos offer the option of playing these real money games for free in demo mode. This enables players to practice for as long as they want before depositing money and playing for real cash.

6.   Are there any specific rules or customs unique to Chemin de Fer Baccarat?

Chemin de Fer differs from other baccarat variations like Punto Banco in that it involves more skill, as players can decide when they want to take the third card. Additionally, it differs from Baccarat Banque, where the casino always acts as the Banker.

Playing Baccarat’s Fastest Variation

Chemin de Fer is not a difficult game to learn, but it is more challenging than its more prevalent Punto Banco counterpart. This baccarat variation involves a skill element, so it requires practice and a good understanding of all of the gameplay components.

Nevertheless, with the information we��ve provided you with above, you can be certain you��ve covered every important aspect of the game.

With that in mind, before playing Chemin de Fer baccarat, make sure you understand all of the rules, set a fixed bankroll, and pick a betting strategy that works best for you. Doing this will enable you to enjoy the fun and excitement of Chemin de Fer while playing the game optimally.

Title Image Credit: Kitreel/Shutterstock

]]>
Iron Cross Craps Strategy: An In-Depth Analysis https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/iron-cross-craps/ Thu, 22 Aug 2024 13:41:12 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=41578 Iron Cross Craps Strategy: What You Need to Know
  • The premise of the Iron Cross Craps strategy is that you have only one roll to win, making it a one-hit-and-down setup.
  • The Iron Cross Strategy involves placing bets on the 5, 6, and 8, along with a field bet, to cover more potential outcomes.
  • This strategy offers frequent wins, but while losses are less common, they can be more substantial.
  • The Iron Cross betting strategy works just as well in online craps as it does in a local casino.
  • Remember to set a betting limit to manage potential losses, as with all craps betting strategies. The Iron Cross is an exciting approach, but it doesn’t guarantee a win.

The Iron Cross craps strategy involves making use of the Place bets and the Field bet to give you a high chance of winning on every throw of the dice. Given the sheer number of bets and variety of possible strategies, the Iron Cross is one that��s easy to master.

In this article, we��ll review what the Iron Cross is all about and we��ll review the steps, the math, and answer the most important question: is the Iron Cross a good craps strategy to deploy in at the casino?

What is The Craps Iron Cross Strategy?

The craps Iron Cross strategy is popular because it is set up to cash in on a hot shooter. The Iron Cross craps strategy covers multiple numbers, so it produces regular, small wins. In a casino game like craps, where the house holds a small advantage, many players get more enjoyment if they can play longer and get frequent small wins instead of aiming for a unlikely jackpot win.

If that sounds like it��s a betting style that suits you, the craps Iron Cross betting method might be a good fit. You need only learn two basic bet types: Field bets and Place bets.

The goal is simple: use a combination of these two bets to cover every throw of the dice on the craps table except a 7. Specifically, we��ll use the Place bets for 5,6, and 8. Then we��ll use the Field bet for 2,3,4,9,10,11, and 12. As long as the dice don��t equal 7, you��ll make money on every throw.

Image for iron cross craps strategy bet locations

Image Credit: Shutterstock

Craps Iron Cross Strategy: Place and Field Bets Overview

Because Place and Field bets are a little bit off the beaten path in terms of craps bets, it��s good to do a quick review of the more popular bets in craps.

This baseline gives you a jumping-off point for understanding where and how the craps Iron Cross strategy differs from standard gameplay and betting approaches.

  • Pass Line/Come Bet: While these bets are not part of the Iron Cross, learning them is to understand the essential flow of the game. Most people bet on a version of the Pass Line and/or Come bets. When you place these bets, the next roll results in one of three outcomes: a 7 or 11 wins (paying even money), a 2,3, or 12 loses. In either of those two outcomes, the Pass Line/Come bet is concluded.

    However, should the first roll of a Pass Line/Come bet be any other number (4,5,6,8,9, or 10, collectively known as points) the bet changes and is now subject to a brand new set of rules. Your wager is now affected by two numbers: if the dice come 7, your Pass Line/Come bet loses, but if that point is rolled before a 7 appears, it wins and pays even money. The wager stays alive until one of those two outcomes.

We��re lumping these two bets in together because they behave the same way; the only difference is that players place Pass Line bets at the beginning of a shooter��s turn. Craps players place Come bets during the shooter��s turn.

Many players like to have wagers on several points at a time. By doing so, they stand to profit when a hot shooter comes along (someone who throws point after point without throwing a 7). Establishing points via Pass Line/Come is a valid option, but what if you don��t want to wait? Read on!

  • Place: These bets mimic the Pass Line and Come bets that have passed and are tied to point throws. That is, they win if their point appears before a 7, they lose on a 7, and are unaffected by any other throw. However, there are a few important differences.

    When you make a Place bet on a number, you��re selecting the specific point rather than taking what the dice give you, as you would on a Pass Line/Come bet. Also, that wager is active immediately on that number; there is no need to pass through the first stage of rules on Pass Line/Come (that win on 7 or 11 and lose on 2,3, or 12).  

Payouts on Place bets vary with the number you select and are another difference with Pass Line/Come bets. For 6 and 8, you win $7 for every $6 wagered. For 5 and 9, you win $7 on every $5 wagered, and for 4 and 10, you win $9 for every $5 wagered.

  • Field: this is a simple single-roll bet that pays off when the 8 least common numbers come up on the dice. Place this wager before any throw and you��ll win even money on 3,4,9,10, and 11. Most casinos will pay 2-to-1 on the Field bet if 2 or 12 appear. Field bets lose on 5,6,7, and 8.
Image for iron cross craps strategy bet locations

Image credit: AzureAD/Wikimedia Commons CC BY-SA 3.0

Executing the Craps Iron Cross Strategy 

The first part of the Iron Cross craps betting strategy involves making three simultaneous Place bets on the 5,6, and 8. Remember, Place bets stay in effect until their number hits or a 7 hits. Should any of these numbers come up your bet wins; you��ll collect your chips and re-make the bet if necessary.

Once a dealer recognizes you��re maintaining these active Place bets, they��ll only hand you your profits on a win, leaving the original wager in place as the roll continues.

Adding in the Field Bet

Once you��ve made Place bets, you��re ready for the second part of the Iron Cross craps strategy: the Field bet. This is one of the few wagers the player can make without the assistance of the craps dealers. Field bets win or lose on every throw of the dice, so be ready to replace losses.

The amount you wager depends on the minimum bet at the table. Start with the minimum bet size for the Field bet and the Place 5 bet. But you��ll want to make Place bets on the 6 and 8 in $6 increments, so these wagers will always be a little bit bigger.

For example, at a $15 minimum table, you��d place $15 bets on the Field and Place 5, then for the Place 6 and 8, you��d make $18 wagers, which is the closest multiple of 6 that meets the minimum bet requirements.

Example Craps Iron Cross Strategy Game Flow

You��re at a $10 minimum bet craps table. Here��s how an Iron Cross might play out. Note that when you win, some dealers leave your original bet alone and just slide your profits to you. If they return your original bet as well, you��ll need to remember to replace that wager before the next roll.

Before the dice are out, that is, before the stickman has pushed the dice to the shooter (which is an indication he or she is free to roll) you place a $10 wager directly onto the Field bet.

Then you take $34 in chips, push them in front of you in the Come bet area and tell the closest dealer on to place the 5,6, and 8. The dealer puts $10 on Place 5, and $12 each on Place 6 and 8.

  1. Roll is a 5. Your $10 Field wager loses; you��ll need to replace it with another $10 in chips. Your Place 6 and 8 bets are unaffected but your Place 5 bet is a winner. The dealer will slide $14 in profits to you. So far you��re ahead $4 ($14 minus the $10 on the lost Field bet.)
  2. Roll is a 2. All Place bets are safe, and your Field bet is a double winner! (Remember 2 and 12 get paid out 2-to-1). The dealer slides $20 in chips to you.
  3. Roll is an 8. The Place 5 and Place 6 are unaffected, and the Place 8 is a winner, netting you $12. Your $10 Field bet loses so you replace it. This throw earned you $2.
  4. Roll is a 10.  Place bets are unaffected. Your Field bet is a winner, netting you $10 for this throw.
  5. Roll is a 4. Place bets are unaffected and the Field nets you another $10.
  6. Roll is a 7. All four of your bets lose and are raked. For this sequence, you made $46 against $34 in wagers, resulting in a $12 profit.

Players using $10 Pass Line/Come bets to establish points would have gotten hit hard in this sequence. An initial Pass Line bet would have gone to 5, followed by a losing Come bet when the 2 appeared.

Players who kept betting the Come would have gotten $10 bets established on the 8,10, and 4 before seeing all bets wiped out by the 7 before any of the points had paid off.

Image for craps iron cross article

Image Credit: VITALII BORKOVSKYI/Shutterstock

Advantages of the Craps Iron Cross Strategy

If you followed the example above, you can see that best outcome is when Field numbers appear because the result is pure profit. And when the Place bets win, it��s at least enough to cover the lost Field bet. Here are some positives about the Iron Cross craps strategy:

  • Wide Coverage: With a Field bet plus Place bets on 5, 6, and 8, every outcome is covered except for 7.
  • Frequent Wins: There are 36 possible combinations using two dice; six of those result in a 7. That means when you play the Iron Cross, 30 of 36 rolls (83.3%) have a positive outcome.
  • Fun: Frequent wins makes for engaging and exciting gameplay.

Variations of the Iron Cross Craps Strategy

There are several variations of the Iron Cross strategy that players can explore:

  • Pressed Place Bets: Instead of taking your profit on a Place bet win, you can tell the dealer to ��press it.�� That��s craps language that indicates to the dealer that you want to use your winnings to increase the size of your bet.
  • Differential Place Bets: Because the Place 6 and 8 have a smaller house edge, some players like to bet a little more on these two bets.  At a $10 table you might have $18 each on Place 6 and 8.
  • Other Bets: Advanced players might enhance their wins on Place 6 and 8 by also betting Hard 6 and/or Hard 8 bet, which pay a bonus when the number comes up as a double (e.g. if 6 is rolled as 3-3). ?Just remember Hardway bets have a big house advantage, so they��ll add some flavor to your game, but they won��t help your odds of winning.
Image for iron cross craps strategy bet locations

Image Credit: Shutterstock

Disadvantages Of The Craps Iron Cross Strategy

While the Iron Cross strategy has several advantages, it��s no craps panacea.

  • Overall House Edge: no betting strategy or sequence can overcome a game where the individual bets have a house edge. The Iron Cross is a gameplay strategy to maximize the craps experience, but it is not a strategy that will make money in the long run.
  • Field Bet: To put a finer point on the house edge question, any strategy that relied on the Field bet should be met with skepticism. The house edge on a standard Field bet is 5.56%. However, some casinos offer 3-to-1 on either 2 or 12 (but rarely both) instead of the standard 2-to-1, cutting the edge down to 2.8%.
  • Limited Big Wins: The Iron Cross betting approach is more likely to deliver small, frequent wins versus other multi-number strategies which can deliver bigger profits on a long roll.

In a qualitative comparison, the Iron Cross strategy stands out for its frequent wins and engaging gameplay. However, quantitatively, strategies involving pass line and come bets with full odds offer a lower house edge and higher potential payouts, making them more favorable for long-term play.

Win More Stacks With The Craps Iron Cross Strategy

The Iron Cross strategy offers an engaging way to play craps, appealing to players who like seeing a steady stream of chips come their way, however small the stacks are.

While it provides a sense of momentum and excitement, it also comes with disadvantages such as the house edge and limited potential for big wins. But as long as you know the pros and cons before you play, you might just find the Iron Cross to be the perfect intersection of risk and reward!

Title Image Credit: VITALII BORKOVSKYI/Shutterstock

]]>
What Is a 3 Bet in Poker And How to Factor it Into Your Poker Strategy https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/what-is-a-3-bet-in-poker/ Wed, 21 Aug 2024 13:21:24 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=41448 What is a 3 Bet in Poker: What You Need to Know
  • A 3 bet is the 3rd bet in a poker round, when a player raises on the 2 bet in poker, or the initial preflop raise.
  • This happens when one player bets, another player raises, and then either the original bettor or another player makes another raise. This second raise constitutes a 3 bet
  • In Texas Hold ‘Em and Omaha Poker, the blinds are considered the first bet, which is why the second raise is a ‘3 bet’
  • For example, if one player raises to $15 before the flop, and the other player makes it $45, the player raising to $45 is making a 3-bet.
  • Preflop betting is a huge part of poker strategy. This guide will take you through exactly what poker 3 bet is, how the value of your poker hands factors into your decision making, and how to build and implement a three bet in poker strategy.

A 3 bet in online poker is a a raise made after another player has made a raise already. Although the expression is often used to describe pre-flop action, a poker 3 bet can also happen after the flop.

During a poker game, 3 betting is an important part of poker strategy, from video poker to live dealer poker, allowing players to increase their aggression levels, resulting in winning more pots when bluffing and scooping bigger pots with the best value poker hands.

Figuring out when to 3 bet in poker, how to size your 3 bet poker properly depending on a situation, and what poker hands to pick can be tricky, but it is essential on your path to becoming a successful and profitable poker player in the long run.

What is a 3 Bet in Poker: The Basics

If you��re new to the game of online poker, the definition in the introduction will give you an idea of a 3 bet is and how it works. However, the definition alone doesn��t explain what makes this bet different from other bets and why it��s so important to develop a deep understanding of this concept.

There are several main goals that we want to achieve when placing a 3 bet in poker, and we can accomplish two or more of these with a single bet:

  • Taking control of the betting �C When you 3 bet in poker before the flop, players who stick around will usually call, giving you control of the betting on future streets.
  • Hand protection �C When you have a strong hand, 3 bet poker helps you reduce the number of players to the flop, making it easier to realize your equity.
  • Isolating weak players �C You can use 3 bet poker to target weak players and attack their raises, ensuring you play them heads-up by removing other players from the pot.
  • Making you harder to play against �C If other players know that you are capable of 3 betting, they��ll be less likely to attack your blinds, and when they do, they��ll have to fight harder for the pots.

Like with every other aspect of poker strategy, such as ICM in poker, finding a good balance is crucial. You want to 3 bet at the right frequency and with the correct poker hands to make the most out of this move.

Most players don��t do it enough, but there are also those who make one of the top 10 mistakes in poker, 3 betting too often, leaving them exposed to observant opponents who��ll take advantage of this tendency.

image for what is a a 3 bet in poker

Image credit: Andrew Angelov/Shutterstock

What Does 3 Bet Mean in Poker: Purpose & Strategy of a 3 Bet in Poker

A 3 bet in poker is one of the most powerful moves when it comes to pre-flop betting. In many lower-stakes games, players don��t know how to properly respond to it, and very few have balanced 4 betting ranges. This means that a good 3 betting strategy can give you a big edge.

By attacking a pre-flop raise, you��re conveying a message that you have a strong hand, allowing you to pick up the pot right then and there or proceed to the flop with an advantage.

On high-card boards, you��ll have a range advantage, and on lower and middling boards, you��ll still have some coverage because of a balanced poker strategy that doesn��t include just the best poker hands.

When deciding whether to play 3 bet poker or not, there are a few things to look at:

  • The raiser table position �C A player raising from a late position will usually have a weaker range, which means you can attack it with a wider scope of poker hands. Conversely, an early position raise conveys more strength, which should lead to a tighter 3 betting range.
  • Your hand �C Your hand is important when deciding whether to 3 bet. Some of your strongest holdings will want to 3 bet almost always, while other poker hands are good candidates for light 3 bets, especially against late position openers.
  • Stack sizes �C It��s important to be aware of all relevant stack sizes and poker chip values when making a pre-flop 3 bet. If there are particularly short stacks still to act or the original raiser doesn��t have many chips behind, you should usually tighten your 3 betting range.

In addition to these general considerations, you should always think about any specific reads you have on the player whose raise you��re attacking.

If you know someone to be opening a very tight range in general, you��ll want to deviate from your standard pre-flop poker strategy and skip on some of the weakest theoretically correct 3 bets. By the same token, against players who open too frequently and have a wide opening range, you should be looking for opportunities to 3 bet in poker.

That said, always try to think beyond the pre-flop. If you know someone is sticky and will often call a 3 bet to see the flop, you should increase your frequency when in position and avoid some of the marginal 3 bets when out of position.

What is 3 Bet Poker: Types of 3 Bets

We��ve already talked about some of the main goals we want to achieve when 3 betting. With these goals in mind, 3 bets can be divided into three main groups:

  • Value 3 bets – These are 3 bets done with the strongest part of our range, like big pocket pairs, AK, and AQ. What exactly our value poker 3 bet range looks like will depend on the position where the raise is coming from, and any reads we have on the player. For example, pocket 9s are a value poker 3 bet against a button open, but we can��t raise with them for value against a reasonable UTG (under the gun) raise.
  • Bluff 3 bets – Certain poker hands play very well as bluffs before the flop. Some of the best bluffing 3 bet candidates are small suited aces because of their ability to flop flush and straight draws, which allow you to put a lot of pressure on your opponent.
  • Semi-bluff 3 bets – When talking about semi-bluff 3 betting poker hands, we��re talking about post-flop situations. With certain drawing hands, you��ll want to go for a 3 bet poker to put the maximum pressure and try to win with aggression while still maintaining some equity if you get called.

What is a 3 Bet in Poker: Important Factors to Consider

Armed with the answer to ‘what is a 3 bet in poker?’ what its main goals are, and the three major types of 3 bet, we can now move on to the most important part: the implementation.

It is one thing to say that it��s good to 3 bet because it helps us improve our aggression and win more pots. It is an entirely different thing, though, to figure out when to 3-bet in poker and what are some of the most important factors to pay attention to besides the one we��ve mentioned earlier.

Poker Game Dynamics

Game dynamics will play a huge role in how you construct your 3 betting ranges. While you can use GTO charts as your starting point, you shouldn��t be following these blindly, especially in lower stakes and live games, where players often have pronounced tendencies that you can take advantage of.

When figuring out your pre-flop strategy for a particular poker table at a casino, you should first figure out how that table plays overall. Are general tendencies more passive or are they on a more aggressive side? Are players opening a lot of hands, are there many callers before the flop, etc.?

This also applies to games of online poker, live dealer poker, or video poker. The same poker strategies apply to digital games as much as local casino games.

This information will help you create an idea of what their tendencies are and what their hand ranges look like. Based on this knowledge, you can make adjustments to your 3 betting strategy, adding or removing hands and deciding if including some of the marginal poker hands makes sense or if you should stick to a tighter, more straightforward approach.

Player Stack Sizes

Likewise, you should also be aware of stack sizes, especially in tournaments, where this is one factor that changes constantly.

Perhaps the player to your left has been on a 50+ big blind stack for the entire poker tournament, but they had just lost a huge hand, and now they are down to just seven or eight big blinds. This is something you have to consider when deciding whether to 3 bet light, as you��ll be committed to calling that player��s all-in once you 3 bet.

In cash games, you won��t often have to deal with short stacks, but you should be careful when entering pots against extremely deep-stacked opponents. When 3 betting in these situations, you need to have a solid plan for future streets and a general idea of how you want to proceed in a pot when you miss or make a marginal hand.

It doesn��t take that much for a pot to balloon out of control, and it usually starts with a 3-bet before the flop, so you must always be very aware of all stack sizes and seriously consider them when making your decisions.

image for what is a a 3 bet in poker

Image credit: Vasilchenko Nikita/ Shutterstock

Common Mistakes to Avoid When 3 Betting

Playing aggressive poker at a online casino isn��t just effective. It��s also fun and exciting, so it��s not hard to fall into the trap of taking things too far. To help you avoid these situations, here are a few common mistakes and pitfalls to avoid when it comes to 3 betting:

  • 3 betting too much against early position opens – Unless you have a very specific reason to think otherwise, you should respect early position opens and only go after them with very strong poker hands. This is especially true when you are in an early position as well and have several players to act after you. Many players tend to forget about other people involved in a hand and focus only on the original opener, which can be a costly mistake to make.
  • Not balancing properly �C When 3 betting, you have to make it difficult for your opponents to put you on a hand. If you��re 3 betting only with your strongest poker hands, good players will quickly pick up on it. Instead, you want to use what��s known as a ��polarized�� range, which includes your best hands but also a decent number of weaker hands.
  • Using a bad sizing �C It��s very important to use a proper size when 3 betting. While there is no one magic number, you want to make the 3 bet big enough so that it��s not an automatic call for your opponent with their entire range. This is especially true when 3 betting out of position, as you almost never mind picking up the pot on the spot. When playing deep-stacked, good players will often use big 3 bet poker sizes to make it harder for their opponents to call and to send a clear message that if they do call, they might end up playing for the stacks by the river.

For example:

If you��re playing 200 big blinds deep and face a cutoff raise in the big blind, you will often want to 3 bet with a hand like Ah5h. But if the cutoff opens to 3 BBs (big blinds), you should 3 bet to at least 10, and maybe even 12 big blinds.

Anything smaller will make it an easy call for a player in position, and that eliminates a big part of the reason you��re 3 betting in the first place, i.e., to win the pot without going to the flop.

Advanced 3 Betting Tactics

The concept of 3 betting in poker is a vast and very important topic, so this article, as long as it is, doesn��t nearly cover all of the different angles and nuances there are to this move.

With that in mind, we��ll quickly go over some advanced 3 betting tactics that can help nudge you in the right direction as you look to improve and solidify your pre-flop strategy.

Creating a Balanced 3 Bet Poker Range

We��ve mentioned a few times in this article the importance of a balanced 3 betting range, but what does this mean exactly? There isn��t a one-fit-all answer to this question, as what your 3 betting range looks like will depend on stack sizes, positions, and player tendencies.

Generally speaking, though, you want to have a range that has your good poker hands balanced out with enough weaker hands so that your poker strategy isn��t too predictable.

For example:

If you��re 3-betting hands like AK, AQ, KQs, and pocket pairs down to pocket 10s for value, you will want to include hands like KQo, A2s �C A5s, and some suited connectors into your 3 betting range to create a good balance.

Paying Attention to Poker Hand Frequencies

In addition to figuring out a solid range, you also need to think about frequencies. If a hand like KQo is in your 3-bet bluffing range, this doesn��t mean you��ll want to 3-bet with it every time. Maybe you��ll do it 70% of the time and fold it the remaining 30%. To balance this out, you��ll sometimes just call with your strongest poker hands like pocket Aces.

Combining 3 Betting With Other Post-Flop Strategies

In the ideal world, your opponents would be folding to all of your 3 bets, and you��d be printing money. In the real world, however, this doesn��t happen, and you��ll often have to play in 3 bet poker pots across multiple streets.

When devising your 3-bet poker strategy, you always need to have this in mind. The moment you make a 3 bet, you should be thinking about different scenarios and how you want to tackle them. What sort of boards will you be continuing on, what board textures are best to check on, and what, if any, opportunities there are to go for a check-raise?

When planning all this, you��ll have to think about more than just your hand. Your opponents�� ranges, tendencies, and stack sizes will play a huge role in how you devise your post-flop strategies in 3 bet poker pots, but those fall outside of scope of this particular article.

What is a 3 Bet In Poker: Your Questions Answered

  • Is a 3bet better than an open raise? – The benefits of a 3 bet in poker over an open-raise is that a 3 bet will often force players with weaker hold cards out before the flop, reducing competition for the pot. With a good 3-bet, you might also pick up the entire pot preflop, which you cannot do with an open-raise.
  • What is a linear 3 bet poker range? – A linear 3 bet range is a list of poker hands, in descending order a value, that are strong enough to 3 bet on. A linear 3 bet range is one composed exclusively of value-bets.
  • What hands should I 3bet with? – As noted, there isn’t one straight answer to this question. It will depend on table dynamics, stack sizes, and whether you’re using polarized or linear betting ranges. Familiarizing yourself with all aspects of pre-flop betting is the best way to decide on which poker hand to three bet on at any given time.

Adding 3 Bet Poker to Your Poker Strategy

A poker 3 bet is one of the most powerful weapons in a player��s pre-flop betting arsenal. Knowing when to 3 bet, what hands to do it with, and how to properly size your 3 bets to get value and deny your opponents�� equity is essential to your long-term success in poker.

While we covered many important aspects of the 3 betting poker strategy in this article, the bulk of your knowledge and understanding will come from practice and analysis. Don��t be afraid to test different things against different players and then spend some time analyzing these spots.

A little free video poker is a great way to practice your 3-betting without spending a dime!

With time and practice, you��ll be able to pick up many interesting trends and flaws in both your and your opponent��s game, allowing you to improve and perfect your 3 betting poker strategy.

When used correctly, this can be one of the most powerful tools in your toolbox. Most players, especially those new to the game, are afraid of a poker 3 bet, whether when they have to face them or when they��re the ones who should use them. Break away from this pattern, develop an understanding of this important porker strategy concept, and you��ll quickly see significant improvements in your results!

Title image credit: Bordovski Yauheni/Shutterstock

]]>
What is Ghosting in Online Poker and How to Avoid It? https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/ghosting-in-online-poker/ Tue, 20 Aug 2024 12:22:49 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=41392 What You Need to Know About Online Poker Ghosting
  • Ghosting is a form of cheating in online poker where a highly ranked player plays using the account of a less skillful player. This is also called multi-accounting.
  • Since players in online poker are normally ranked to make matchmaking fairer. Ghosting allows more experienced and skillful players to take advanced of newer, less experienced players.
  • Ghosting online poker can also mean a more experienced player coaching a less experienced player on how to play their hand during an online poker game.
  • World class-players such as Bryn Kenney, Ali Imsirovic and Jake Schindler have all been accused of ghosting in order to easy money off other players.
  • This article will fully explain what ghosting is in online poker, live dealer poker, or video poker, why it’s a problem, and how to avoid getting caught out by this form of cheating.

If you��re looking to learn about ghosting in online poker, you��ve come to the right page (and no, it��s not when someone you know suddenly cuts off all communication on social media without any explanation). In the world of online poker, ghosting refers to a skilled player taking over for a less experienced user during gameplay.

This sneaky tactic has been on the rise in recent years, prompting operators to take action. Keep reading to learn more about poker ghosting and the measures being used to combat it.

What is Ghosting in Online Poker ?

Cheating in poker can take on many forms, with many high level poker cheating scandals to prove it. However one of the most potent forms is online poker ghosting. In simple terms, ghosting involves a player with higher skill replacing a less skillful player during gameplay.

This could be just for one hand or for extended periods. The most dangerous form of poker ghosting happens in online poker tournament play.

A group may have a tournament specialist ready to jump into the game when another player in the group reaches a higher stage in the tournament, such as the final table. When this happens, the expert will enter the game and use their ability to get the best results and potentially win the tournament.

image for ghosting in poker article

Image credit: Olexyander/Shutterstock

Why is Online Poker Ghosting a Problem?

Poker is one of the few online casino games where skill is an element of gameplay. An experienced or high-skill player will make more intelligent betting decisions, play the best poker hands more accurately, and be more subtle with bluffing.

Any group of players who can call upon such a skillful player will give themselves an unfair advantage. Of course, if the skilled player were to join the tournament at the start, that would be fine. Instead, cheating occurs when the skilled player replaces another without the other participants knowing. That is why all top online poker platforms ban ghosting and deem it to be cheating.

Online Poker Ghosting ‘Stables’

On the surface, ghosting would not be a major issue in poker if it was a casual occurrence. However, because ghosting is possible in online poker, there is a real danger, and it is becoming increasingly common. In fact, there are professional-level poker players who have put together ��stables�� of mediocre players that they stake. Vice versa, less-skilled players have recruited experts to be their ghost player.

Stables will send the weaker players into the initial stages of big-money online poker tournaments. These players may still be good enough to get through early rounds and build big stacks. When the stable player manages to go deep into the tournament, the ghosting poker expert will take over and compete in the latter stages or final table.

So-called ��grindhouses�� have become increasingly common, hosting dozens of players who will literally grind online poker tournaments in attempts to go deep into the competition. This has become enough of a problem that some estimates suggest the grindhouses are making millions by cheating.

The situation was thrown into the spotlight when legendary tournament player Bryn Kenney was alleged to be operating a stable of players.

Types of Online Poker Ghosting

Poker ghosting can happen in several ways beyond stables and in tournaments. Below are the types of ghosting that online casinos prohibit:

  • Joining an online poker room in the middle of a game and allowing someone else to play for you.
  • Agreeing to play for someone else during an online game or tournament.
  • Contacting an experienced player and having them give you poker tips during gameplay. This form of poker ghosting online is almost impossible to detect.
  • Using two accounts simultaneously during the same game to trick opponents into thinking there are two players.

Risks and Consequences of Poker Ghosting

Poker ghosting is a massive issue for online poker rooms, be they video poker, live poker dealer or fully virtual games, not least because it is extremely hard to detect when it is happening. Even if the site can detect ghosting, proving it is even more difficult. That��s because many poker players have unique styles of play that they change interchangeably. In other words, it is hard to know if there are two different players or just one player using distinctive styles.

While finding concrete proof that someone is ghosting rather than simply playing differently is impossible, online casinos don��t need proof. These operators are free to ban players whenever they want and for any reason. If they even suspect a player is poker ghosting, that player is likely to lose their account and be banned.

image for ghosting in poker article

Image credit: Elnur/Shutterstock

Why Should You Avoid Ghosting Poker Players?

Online poker casinos are also turning to simple campaigns to warn players to avoid ghosting. For novice players, the idea of drafting an expert player to win a tournament can be appealing. Likewise, skilled players creating stables of players who go deep into competition could make gathering prize money easier.

However, the reality of poker ghosting is that it hurts the poker room, but more importantly, it harms your fellow players. It is not only considered cheating and a bannable offense by poker operators but also unethical. If you are handing your deep tournament performances to a better player, you will also not be learning the theory, like ICM in poker, improve your own game.

Your skills will never improve, and you will never experience the excitement of playing at a real money poker tournament. Of course, if you are caught or suspected of ghosting, the poker room or casino will ban you and block your account. In cases where someone is caught multiple times, sites may even share information, making it hard for you to have accounts with any online poker provider.

Detecting and Reporting Ghosting Behavior: Protecting Yourself Online

To help find cheaters, poker sites are increasingly turning to AI, which will automatically search for anomalies in player style. Because of how hard it is to definitively spot ghosting poker techniques, it can be difficult for players to get involved with detecting ghosting. Even so, there are some things you can do:

  • If you encounter a player more than once in a tournament and their playing style is drastically different, this can raise some concerns.

  • Is there a player on your table who seems to be of much higher skill than anyone else? Remember, poker ghosting involves drafting a top player to complete a tournament.

  • Do you see the same player winning multiple tournaments over a short time? Admittedly, the online poker room will likely spot this before you.

  • You can report your suspicions to the online poker operator. Whether it is through live chat or email, your report should include the player��s name, the games you suspect cheating, and dates.

Avoiding This New Style of Online Poker Cheating

Ghosting poker techniques are an increasingly common form of cheating and have become more dangerous for poker rooms and players. Remember, ghosting in poker is harming other players, so never be tempted to engage in this method. Doing so could also lead to you being banned from the poker room.

Title image credit: Kikostock/Shutterstock

]]>
What Ever Happened To Katrina Bookman: The Woman Who Was Denied Her $43 Million Casino Slot Machine Win? https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/katrina-bookman/ Fri, 16 Aug 2024 10:37:21 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=35418 Sure, casinos are all about having fun, but at the end of the day we��re all in it to win it. But even if you win big, like Katrina Bookman appeared to do, it doesn’t mean you’ll actually get the money.

In a case that has quickly become one of the most infamous cases in gambling history, Katrina Bookman entered Resorts World Casino in New York and hit a win for almost $43 million!?

But when she came to withdraw what would have been record slot winnings, she was informed by a casino employee that the slot machine had malfunctioned, and she had won nothing.

What could have become the biggest slot machine jackpot in US history soon became an unparalleled ordeal for Bookman��

The Katrina Bookman Story: What Actually Happened at the Casino?

On that fateful day over six years ago, Bookman headed to Resorts World Casino in New York.

She was playing Sphinx Wild, a popular slot game by a reputable software provider, and put just 40 cents into the machine.

It��s impossible to imagine how she must have felt when the machine alerted her to a jackpot win of $42.9 million.

Hitting the big time that day in late August 2016, Bookman saw the luck for her whole family change �C earmarking $1 million for her aspiring barber son. Envisioning his dreams of a family barbershop come to fruition, she could barely wait to tell him the news.

You Didn’t Win Nothing

However, the slot machine��s alarm bells were no match for those in Bookman��s head when she joyously went to collect her winnings.

Turning her away empty-handed, casino management asked her to review the venue��s ��official ruling�� and return the following morning. Disturbed, as she turned to return home, she overheard a staff member saying Bookman ��didn��t win nothing.��

After a sleepless night, Bookman returned to Resorts World Casino clutching the winning ticket.

To her horror, she was instead offered a complimentary steak dinner and the alleged $2.25 Sphinx Wild winnings she was owed, thanks to a machine malfunction.

This would be a heartbreaking result for anyone, but it was particularly hard news for Bookman �C raised in foster care, homeless as a teenager and later a single mom to four kids �C to take, as she hasn��t had it easy in life.

Katrina Bookman
Image: WABC

��I kept thinking about my family. The struggle I��ve been through; it��s hard to cope,�� she told WABC in a tearful interview.

For someone who could really do with a break, the machine��s malfunction seemed particularly cruel.

Katrina Bookman: The Court Case

Bookman turned the casino down and instead took them up on a date at the Queens County Supreme Court, where she aimed to sue Resorts World Casino, partners Genting New York LLC, and software provider IGT for $42,949,672.76 in damages

What would have been the largest slot machine jackpot in US history was fast becoming a record-breaking nightmare.

Bookman, who was denied the full payout, cited that the torment of the saga affected her nervous system and left her ��embarrassed, anxious and depressed.�� 

Her attorney Alan Ripka challenged the accused, arguing that she was entitled to $6,500 (the maximum slot machine win) at the bare minimum. “The machine takes your money when you lose. It ought to pay it when you win,” retorted Ripka.

However, the defendant refused the claim, instead apologizing to Bookman for the inconvenience the ��malfunction�� had caused. 

��You can��t claim a machine is broken because you want it to be broken,�� Alan Ripka told CNNMoney.

��Does that mean it wasn��t inspected? Does it mean it wasn��t maintained? And if so, does that mean people that played there before [Bookman] had zero chance of winning?��

The New York State Gaming Commission said the machine had been displaying a disclaimer that read: “Malfunctions void all pays and plays.”

Katrina Bookman
Image: WABC

Checking out Resorts World��s casino floor games menu, the legendary Sphinx Wild machine is still earning its keep to this day amongst the thousands of titles in the New York complex.

Not only that �C there are even updated variations of the slot now available, such as Sphinx and Sphinx 3D.

Where Is Katrina Bookman Now?

Unfortunately, there was no happy ending for Katrina Bookman. After delays to the case due to Covid, a judge at Queens County Supreme Court eventually ruled in favor of the defendants.

The reality was, the machine malfunctioned and the machine did display the following warning message to all players:

Malfunctions void all pays and plays

Can a Casino Just Refuse to Pay Out?

If there is a genuine malfunction with the machine, then, sadly, yes.

In a historical example of a similar trial, Pauline McKee, a 90-year-old grandmother from Illinois, was spinning her way to slot heaven on the Miss Kitty game at the Isle Casino Hotel Waterloo.?

To her astonishment, she rang in a slot jackpot of $41 million. 

Enjoying casino games throughout her life, the seasoned gambler was skeptical but had high hopes of being proven wrong.

Much like Bookman, McKee was damningly told that she had not won a dime close to the supposed jackpot due to a slot machine malfunction, so the argument was taken to the Iowa Supreme Court.

Unfortunately, the defendant (Isle Casino Hotel) won the case, claiming that on-screen rules state that ��Malfunction voids all pays and plays.�� 

Though devastating, real-life examples are sometimes necessary to remind gamblers that random number generators (RNGs) operate the wins of slot machines.

You can��t predict their outcome, with big losses just as likely (if not more) than massive jackpot wins.

Plus, with daily wear and tear, this makes occasional technical malfunctions just as likely as moderate jackpots that do pay out. 

Regardless, we hope fortune shines in Katrina Bookman��s favor and this high roller hell doesn��t taint her fighting spirit.

For more slots scandals, check out our article on Brian Christopher.

Lead image: Katrina Bookman via WABC

]]>
12 Sneaky Ways To Cheat At Slots https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/slot-cheats-that-work/ Fri, 16 Aug 2024 10:07:38 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=7171 Wondering how anyone could cheat at slots? Slot machines are some of the most lucrative games on the casino floor for both the players and the house.

And cheaters!

With such huge payouts available, it’s no wonder that slot machines have always been a game of cat and mouse between cheaters and the house.

Let’s check out some of the naughty tricks used by slots cheaters over the years. We don’t recommend ever trying them yourself, though!

1. Cheat Code

Gambling authorities are there to ensure that the gaming industry is operating correctly and fairly.

Engineers design the best casino games so that they can be monitored and audited while also delivering quality gameplay. But what happens when an engineer decides to rig the codes for their own advantage?

The infamous slots cheat Ronald Dale Harris – an engineer from The Nevada Gaming Commission – did exactly that. He sure knew how to manipulate a slot machine!

For years, he cheated machines by knowing the source codes. It wasn’t until his partner had a big win in the casino – $100,000 on a keno game in 1995 – that the scam was discovered.

2. Shaved Coins

This scam using shaved coins doesn’t really exist today, but it’s still interesting to know about.

As technology advanced, slot machines began to use a light sensor to register payment. In a large number of machines, the optic sensor worked separately from the physical comparator.

Basically, that meant that if a shaved coin was sent down at the same time as an object that matched the shape and size of the required stake coin, the shaved coin would be returned whilst the other object would land in the machine and start play.

3. Fake Coins

triangle shape fake coins
Image: cabinda.net

Another method of slots cheating present throughout history was the use of fake coins.

Fake coins were used by con artist Louis ��The Coin�� Colavecchio to scam casinos for years until his arrest in 1998.

He was released in 2006 and quickly re-started his cheating. It was a matter of months before he was unsurprisingly sussed again.

4. Magnet

How to cheat a slot machine with a magnet.

We often get asked how to cheat a slot machine with a magnet.

Let��s get one thing clear: it��s not actually possible to cheat modern day slot machines with a magnet, since they��re all programmed by computer software and aren��t magnetic.

However, people used to be able to cheat with a magnet on the older machines, when they were made of metal.

To cheat at slots using a magnet, you could spin the reels and then use a strong magnet on the outside of the machine to stop them spinning when you saw your winning combination.

Cheaters would then remove the magnet and claim the payout.

This wasn’t the most subtle cheat but, if done well, people could easily win lots of cash!

5. Yo-Yo

This slots cheat was all about the technique.

A string is attached to the coin, the coin is sent into the machine until it triggers the start of the game, and then the player brings the coin back up using the string.

Nowadays, this technique is all but redundant thanks to the march of technology.

It’s a real classic though and, if it worked, you could have seen a big win for free.

6. Light Wand

man's hand holding slot machine cheating device
Image: Chronicle.augusta.com

Tommy Glenn Carmichael is one of the most notorious slot cheats in gambling history. He is responsible for the light wand.

Magicians such as David Copperfield, Dynamo and David Blaine might have the ability to create the illusion of something happening, but Carmichael would use his light wand to make jackpot wins magically appear out of thin air.

The light wand would effectively blind the optical sensor on slot machines so it couldn’t work out how many coins had been deposited into the machine, meaning it wouldn’t know when to pay out or how much.

This meant Carmichael could manipulate a slot machine to his advantage, by turning small wins into massive payouts.

7. Piano Wire

This is an oldie but a goody in the world of how to cheat at slots.

A group of men worked together at the Caesars Boardwalk Regency casino in Atlantic City back in 1982. One man opened the targeted slot machine and attached 20-inch long piano wires to the whirring guts of the game.

The wires could then be used to jam the clock that measured the wheel rotations, allowing the group to manipulate the spins.

They hit the $50,000 jackpot but, unfortunately, their whole scam had been filmed and the winning player was arrested before he left the premises.

8. Top-Bottom Joint

tools used to cheat at casino slot games laid out on a green background
Image: poptower.com

This is one of the most cunning methods of cheating at slots and was popular with scammers in the 1970s and 1980s.

They used a special tool that was split into two parts. A top (a metal rod with its end bent in the shape of a ��q��) and a bottom (a long wire).

By putting the bottom in through the coin chute and the top through the coin slot, the cheats were able to jam the machine and force the game to release all the coins it had stored.

Big wins galore!

9. Monkey Paw

It’s that man Carmichael again. He was a total genius, in cheating terms.

He was the creator of the ��monkey paw��. After testing out new methods on a video poker machine, he eventually built the correct contraption. It was amazingly simple.

He got a guitar string and attached it to a bent metal rod. He would thrust it into the machine’s air vent and wriggle it around until he clicked the trigger switch for the coin hopper.

Cue the avalanche of coins.

10. Bill Validator Device

A simple yet very effective slots cheat.

This is a little device that is wrapped around a bill to fool the slot machine into thinking it is accepting a $100 bill when in reality it is just accepting a humble $1 bill.

11. Computer Chip Replacement

Dennis Nikrasch changed the slots cheating game with this idea.

He bought a slot machine and messed about with it in his garage to figure out its flaws.

He worked out the computer chips inside the machines could be re-programmed to be manipulated to pay out jackpots on tap.

Nikrasch ordered a load of these chips, hired a team of scammers, got hold of a bunch of slot machine keys and started a reign of scamming that would bleed casinos dry for years.

And he did it all just by switching the independent chips for his manipulated chips.

12. Software Glitch

Software error sign on computer screen in black and white
Image: businesscomputingworld.co.uk

Software glitches have been manipulated by cheats for decades.

By playing a certain pattern of stakes and games, players could confuse the machine and trigger a glitch that pays out the jackpot.

Many slots cheats benefited from this over the years but now many jackpot winners are also being denied their winnings because of it.

The most famous incident happened in 2015 when 90-year-old grandmother Pauline McKee from Illinois won $41 million on a Miss Kitty slot machine at the Isle Casino Hotel Waterloo.

She tried to sue the casino initially in 2012, but her final appeal was rejected three years later. Unfortunately, historical instances are the reason the casino won this case.

]]>
What’s With All The Deaths at Luxor Las Vegas? https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/deaths-in-luxor/ https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/deaths-in-luxor/#comments Fri, 16 Aug 2024 09:39:08 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=13321 Las Vegas is a city that is full of incredible stories of legend.

This is certainly the case when it comes to the Luxor, where it is believed that an eerily high number of deaths have taken place at the venue, resulting in a huge amount of paranormal activity.

Alongside the usual games of poker, blackjack, and slots, the Luxor is famous for its many grisly deaths and supposed hauntings.

Let’s take a look at the mystery of the deaths at the Luxor and find out how it got dubbed the most haunted casino hotel in Sin City.

Destined to be Doomed From Day One?

The iconic pyramid-shaped casino resort has a notorious reputation for being linked with numerous suspicious and untimely deaths. It’s even part of the well regarded Vegas Ghost Tours.

Many guests that have chosen to stay at the 4,407 room Egyptian-themed resort have frequently shared their experiences of ghostly events. If you take a look at the history of the venue it��s not surprising that there are so many claims of haunted sightings within the property.

The impressive building, which is one of the world��s largest hotels and the 4th largest pyramid, opened in 1993 and took only 18 months and $375 million to build.

It is thought that several construction workers died during the building process, with conspiracy theorists suggesting that the management kept these deaths under wraps to save the reputation of the resort. 

Reasonable grounds for haunting don’t you think?

There are also some who argue that the Luxor was doomed to be haunted before it was even built, simply because it is designed like an Ancient Egyptian tomb �C a sure fire way to upset the spirits.

Many suggest that the Luxor��s haunting has increased since the hotel opened a Titanic themed exhibition in 2008.

The exhibition contains parts of the doomed ship and personal items belonging to many of those who lost their lives in the tragedy.

A History of Tragic Deaths

Luxor Las Vegas
Image: Simon Q/Flickr

In Las Vegas hotels deaths are not exactly uncommon. Approximately 1,100 visitors die every year in Sin City with the majority being from natural causes.

However, 15% of all deaths are suicides, 11% homicides, and an eery 6% go completely unexplained

Nearly all of these deaths will not be reported on because the whole of Las Vegas knows that bad news can affect tourism and reduce the city��s profits.

As such, there is little proof of the many deaths that have occurred at the Luxor.

However, even without these unreported deaths it is clear something strange is happening inside that famous black pyramid. 

The Luxor��s first reported death occurred in 1996 when a lady jumped from the 26th floor of the hotel. 

At the Luxor, suicides of this nature are made extra grisly because the pyramid shape of the building means those leaping to their deaths do so from indoor balconies. This means instead of the street they land in the building’s atrium amongst the other guests.

Another guest is also believed to have fallen to his death, this time from the 10th floor.

The circumstances around his death remain a mystery but there was no evidence to suggest his fall was voluntary.

A Surprisingly Large Range of Grisly Endings

The Luxor has also seen deaths from many other causes.

These have included strangulation, as was the case in the assault, robbery, and murder of a 16-year-old woman by the name of Sara Gruber. 

But perhaps the most alarming means of murder came in 2007 when a casino worker, 24-year-old Willebaldo Dorante Antonio, was killed by a home-made explosive device in a plot that Newsweek compared to the hit TV show CSI.

The bomb was set under a plastic cup that had been left turned upside down on the top of his car.

When Antonio turned the cup over the explosion was triggered, ripping a hole in the car’s roof and killing him. The casino was not evacuated, and it continued to run as normal. 

Three years later, the highest profile death took place at the resort. UNLV football player Demario Reynolds got into a fight with another guest, Jason Simon Sindelar, over his partner.

Sindelar was an MMA fighter and struck a devastating blow to Reynolds, who then fell unconscious after hitting the floor and never woke again.

In 2010 a court ruled that Reynolds had died from an overdose and not from the fight.

2012 saw the next death �C a casino employee was murdered by their boyfriend in full view of the public in the lobby, scarring those who witnessed the murder. 

The same year, a case of Legionnaires�� disease took another victim at the hotel. Two cases had been identified previously, with the water being treated both times.

However, this third case was not picked up quickly enough because tests on the water came back negative until just after the victim��s death. Creepy.

A third bizarre death took place that year when an airman visiting from Nellis Air Force Base mysteriously fell 25 feet down an elevator shaft.

Once again, no evidence suggested that the victim��s fall was intentional.

Ghostly Goings On

Luxor and its skybeam
Image: Glen Scarborough/Flickr

With so many deaths occurring at the Luxor over the 29 years it has been open, it��s no wonder that guests report seeing and meeting many ghosts.

But who are they?

The Deadly Blonde

The most common ghost guests report seeing at the Luxor is a mysterious blonde lady who is often seen in bedrooms on the Luxor’s 12th floor.

Guests sleeping in these rooms have been known to wake up fighting for breath and feeling as if they were being choked.

Others report catching glimpses of the woman standing over their bed or feeling a phantom hand running across their face.

The Construction Workers

The hushed-up deaths of several workers during the building��s construction in the 1990s has reportedly led to the appearance of many ghosts.

These were most commonly seen on the dark banks and tunnels of the hotel��s old ��Nile River Tour�� an attraction where guests were ferried to different parts of the pyramid by boat.

Many have suggested that the sight of so many ghosts was one of the main reasons the Luxor demolished the river tour during later renovations.

Titanic��s Passengers

The Luxor��s exhibition on the Titanic includes over 300 artifacts recovered from the bottom of the ocean. Many of these items are extremely personal including clothing, purses, and glasses.

Whilst interesting to look at there have been tons of reports of the item��s original owners coming back to haunt the exhibition, including a shadowy figure who has frequently been seen standing on a near-perfect replica of the doomed ship��s grand staircase.

Other guests have also caught glimpses of one of the Titanic��s lookouts, Frederick Fleet, who committed suicide in 1965.

He stands on the exhibition��s Promenade deck peering out into the gloom, searching for the fateful iceberg.

Is The Luxor Cursed?

As mentioned, there are a number of theories about why so many suspicious deaths have been recorded at the Luxor over the years.

The fact that the resort has endured such trauma even though its construction was only completed in 1993, is quite frightening.

The most popular theory relates to the actual design of the resort.

The Luxor takes its name from the Egyptian city of the same name. The whole premise behind its design was to build a venue that truly encapsulated the heart and spirit of Ancient Egypt.

Unfortunately, the Luxor is not a completely accurate copy of Ancient Egyptian pyramids.

For example, it is believed that pyramids in Ancient Egypt required a Sphinx to be facing both East and West so that the pyramid was protected from evil on both sides.

The Luxor pyramid only has one Sphinx facing East, potentially leaving it exposed to evil spirits

Luxor Sphinx
Image: Mike McBey/Flickr

People also forget that Egyptian pyramids are actually tombs built on the West side of the river Nile. This is the side where the sun sets and where Ancient Egyptians believed the newly dead entered the underworld. 

It just so happens that the Luxor is built on the West side of the Las Vegas strip.

A spooky coincidence that might just explain why so many visitors to Sin City have lost their lives in this hotel. 

Others believe that the untimely death of the construction workers has kickstarted a chain of hauntings.

These have led to more deaths occurring and therefore more ghosts appearing. The opening of the Titanic exhibition in 2008 has only added fuel to this already very spooky fire. 

Another urban legend suggests that after a string of coincidental deaths took place at the resort, local mobsters had a prime opportunity to use the venue as a location to bump off their victims.

After all, who would suspect a thing when people are more willing to believe the existence of a curse?

Finally, it could simply be a sinister run of bad luck for the resort. Las Vegas is all about those hot and cold streaks.

Maybe the Luxor is just experiencing a prolonged run of people being killed on the property grounds.

Whatever you believe, sooner or later their luck has got to turn around. Right?

Want to know more about Luxor Las Vegas besides its ghoulish goings on? Check out our piece on its skybeam that has its own ecosystem.

Lead image: eGuide Travel/Flickr

]]>
https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/deaths-in-luxor/feed/ 38
Top 10 NBA Teams by Market Size https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/nba-teams-by-market-size/ Wed, 14 Aug 2024 15:37:16 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=41311 Size matters when it comes to live television viewing in North America. In the era of cord-cutting and the rise of streaming services, live sports like the NBA are a massive cash cow for traditional TV advertisers. This makes ranking NBA teams by market size a hugely important metric, as large market NBA teams ensure high viewership numbers and a good return on ad spend.

It’s not a surprise that the two largest American TV markets also have two basketball teams. New York City is the largest TV market, and the Big Apple is home to the New York Knicks and Brooklyn Nets. Los Angeles is the second largest TV market, and they have the L.A. Lakers and L.A. Clippers.

Let’s take a look at the rest of the top 10 NBA teams by market size

1. New York Knicks / Brooklyn Nets

NBA teams by market size

Image credit: RarraRorro/Shutterstock

  • Media Market: New York City-Newark, NJ-Stamford, CT
  • TV Market Share: 7.6 million
  • Population: 19.2 million

The metro region around New York City is comprised of the “Tri-State Area” that includes suburbs in New York, New Jersey, and Connecticut. With a population over 19 million, there’s multiple teams for every major sport.

The NBA market has the Knicks and Nets. The MLB has the New York Yankees and New York Mets. The NFL has the New York Giants and New York Jets. The NHL has three teams with the New York Rangers, New York Islanders, and New Jersey Devils.

Even though the Nets have never won an NBA championship and the Knicks have not won a title in over 50 years, the two NBA franchises in Gotham are some of the most valuable NBA teams thanks to their juicy media TV market of nearly 7.6 million and arena locations in Midtown Manhattan and downtown Brooklyn, making them top of the NBA teams by market size rankings.

2. Los Angeles Lakers / Los Angeles Clippers

NBA teams by market size

Image credit: Deo Gracia Cahyardi/Shutterstock

  • Media Market: Los Angeles-Long Beach-Anaheim, CA
  • TV Market Share: 5.9 million
  • Population: 12.8 million

The L.A. Lakers are the most popular sports team in Southern California. And when Hollywood stars want to catch a pro sports team, they’ll be spotted sitting courtside in celebrity row at a Lakers game. Only the Boston Celtics won more NBA titles than the Lakers, who have been a premier NBA franchise ever since Dr. Jerry Buss bought the team in the late 1970s.

The media market in the Los Angeles area is gigantic with nearly 13 million residents and a TV market share that’s almost six million, which is why the City of Angels can sustain two NBA teams and why they are some of the richest NBA teams in the league.

The Clippers are the second team in L.A., and even though they��re not as popular as the Lakers, they’re still ranked #5 as the Top 5 Richest NBA Teams and worth over $4.65 billion.

The SoCal TV market is so huge that it could’ve supported three NBA teams. In the early 2010s, the Sacramento Kings were up for sale and one prospective buyer explored the possibility of relocating the Kings to Orange County, California where they would play their home games in Anaheim in the shows of Disneyland. When the Kings were eventually sold, the new owner vowed to keep the team in Sacramento.

3. Chicago Bulls

NBA teams by market size

Image credit: Bambang/Shutterstock

  • Media Market: Chicago�CNaperville�CElgin, IL
  • TV Market Share: 3.65 million
  • Population: 9.2 million

Chicago is known as America’s “Second City” and the heart of the Midwest. Michael Jordan led the Bulls to six championships during the 1990s, and their dynasty imprinted Chicago as an elite basketball town in the NBA. Their sprawling population dips into southern Wisconsin and northeastern Indiana. The Bulls have a huge reach in the Midwest thanks to a TV market of 3.65 million viewers and a population of over 9.2 million.

4. Philadelphia 76ers

NBA teams by market size

Image credit: Paul Charles/Shutterstock

  • Media Market: Philadelphia, PA-Camden, NJ-Willington, DE
  • TV Market Share: 3.17 million
  • Population: 6.2 million

The City of Brotherly Love is the fourth-largest TV market and just a smidge ahead of Dallas-Fort Worth with 3.17 million viewers. By itself, Philadelphia only has 1.5 million residents, but a massive suburban sprawl surrounds the city extends into two neighboring states. The “mini-tri-state” area includes most of Delaware, southern New Jersey, and eastern Pennsylvania.

If you live in some parts of “South Jersey,” basketball fans get access to TV stations in both NYC and Philly which means they can watch the 76ers, Knicks, and Nets.

5. Dallas Mavericks

NBA teams by market size

Image credit: GGuy/Shutterstock

  • Media Market: Dallas-Fort Worth-Arlington, TX
  • TV Market Share: 3.13 million
  • Population: 8.1 million

Everything is big in Texas, especially the Dallas-Fort Worth metroplex that encompasses over eight million people. The Dallas Mavericks have the benefit of playing in the fifth-largest TV market and fourth-largest metro area in terms of population.

Football is a religion in Texas, so basketball is not the primary sport in the Lone Star state. The Mavs have stiff competition during football season particularly on Friday, Saturday, and Sunday. Friday evenings are designated for high school football statewide (that’s when the term “Friday Night Lights” was coined), and there’s no shortage of college football teams to fill up the TV schedule on Saturday. Of course, all eyes are on the Dallas Cowboys on Sundays. However, as soon as football season ends, the Mavs become the biggest game in town.

Pro hoops fans in the Big D had a lot to cheer about this past season. The Mavs won the Western Conference title and advanced to the 2024 NBA Finals, before their magical run ended when they lost to the Celtics in the championship.

6. Houston Rockets

NBA teams by market size

Image credit: Malik Hussnain/Shutterstock

  • Media Market: Houston-The Woodlands, TX
  • TV Market Share: 2.77 million
  • Population: 7.5 million

Like Dallas, basketball fans in Houston must compete with the insane popularity of football in Texas. The Rockets have struggled in recent years, but the franchise is highly valued thanks to their robust TV market and population of over 7.5 million and steadily growing.

Houston saw a small boost in population when displaced residents from New Orleans relocated to Houston after Hurricane Katrina. Right now, Houston��s TV market reaches nearly 2.8 million homes.

7. Atlanta Hawks

NBA teams by market size

Image credit: RarraRorro/Shutterstock

  • Media Market: Atlanta-Roswell-Sandy Springs, GA
  • TV Market Share: 2.73 million
  • Population: 6.3 million

The Atlanta Hawks are thankful that Atlanta is the largest TV market in the South, because they find themselves in steep competition with baseball and college football. The beloved and popular Atlanta Braves will always being their primary sports team in Atlanta, but the state of Georgia is also in the heart of college football country.

As a result, SEC games are the highest-rated sport on TV. Georgia recently won two college football championships, but the Hawks are lucky they have a sprawling population of over six million to support them.

8. Toronto Raptors

NBA teams by market size

Image credit: JHVEPhoto/Shutterstock

  • Media Market: Toronto-Hamilton-Niagara Falls, Canada
  • TV Market Share: N/A
  • Population: 6.2 million

When looking at metro population figures in the U.S. and Canada, Toronto is the third largest overall behind New York and L.A. with 3.2 million people. The greater Toronto area, which extends to the border at Niagara Falls, reaches over 6.2 million.

The Toronto Raptors are the only non-American NBA team. Vancouver used to have a franchise, but the Grizzlies relocated to Memphis in 2001. Even though ice hockey is the most-popular team sport in Canada, basketball fans love the Raptors.

Canadian markets are not tracked by Nielsen ratings, but we estimate that Toronto’s TV market is no lower than #8 on our list and could be as high as #7 when compared to their American counterparts.

9. Boston Celtics

NBA teams by market size

Image credit:Shutterstock

  • Media Market: Boston-Cambridge-Newton, MA
  • TV Market Share: 2.6 million
  • Population: 4.9 million

The Boston Celtics are the current NBA champion, and the franchise now holds the record with 18 titles. Boston is a frenetic sports town, and the greater New England area loves their Boston sports teams including the Boston Red Sox, Boston Bruins, New England Patriots and the Celtics.

The Celtics’ regional reach encompasses all of New England which includes the states of Massachusetts, Rhode Island, New Hampshire, Maine, Vermont, and Connecticut.

The actual Boston metroplex is only 4.9 million, and their local TV market is only 2.6 million strong. However, New England has over 15 million people. That’s a lot of wicked-loyal fans.

10. Golden State Warriors

NBA teams by market size

Image credit: TMP/Shutterstock

  • Media Market: San Francisco-Oakland-San Jose, CA
  • TV Market Share: 2.58 million
  • Population: 4.5 million

The Bay Area in Northern California is really a sprawling megalopolis linked by three diverse cities anchored by San Francisco with Oakland to the east and San Jose to the south. Silicon Valley is a part of the southern-most part of the Bay Area, so this media market has one of the highest concentrations of wealth and nerd power on the planet.

The Bay Area has roughly 4.5 million residents, but many of them caught basketball fever over the last decade and support the Golden State Warriors. Steph Curry, one of the best point guards of all time, led the Warriors to four championships since 2015, which helped boost the team��s and valuation as a franchise.

The Warriors used to play their games in Oakland but recently relocated to a new arena in downtown San Francisco. Despite the upswing in interest brought about by the Golden State Warriors’ success, they, for the moment still bring up the tail of our NBA teams by market size rankings.

Small Markets and Expansion

The New Orleans Pelicans play in the smallest American TV market in the NBA and they’re ranked #53 overall. Memphis, home of the Grizzlies, is the second-smallest TV market in the NBA and ranked #48.

The Tampa-St. Petersburg metro area is the largest metroplex in America that does not have an NBA team. They are ranked #12 overall, but there��s no indication there will land a future franchise with two teams already in Florida with the Miami Heat and Orlando Magic.

The Seattle-Tacoma metroplex is the second largest TV market without an NBA team and ranked #13. Seattle, located in the heart of the Pacific Northwest, had the SuperSonics before the team was sold in 2006. They relocated to Oklahoma City in 2008 and rebranded as the Thunder.

One of the biggest open secrets in the NBA is that Seattle will be one of the cities that lands a new franchise team when the league eventually votes to expand from 30 to 32 teams. Las Vegas is the other city, but their TV market is only ranked #40.

The other largest American TV markets that do not have an NBA team include Raleigh-Durham at #22, St. Louis at #24, and Nashville at #26. Nashville has been on the shortlist of potential expansion teams, but they��ll have to wait another decade or longer before a new NBA team arrives in Music City, USA.

Montreal is the second-largest city in Canada and its population would be sixth overall if you combine the U.S. and Canada. Montreal could be considered for an NBA team if the league eventually grows to 36 teams by the late 2030s. So while these are the current NBA Teams by market size, this list looks set to shift in the near future.

Title Image Credit: Fukran/Shutterstock

]]>
Heads Up Poker: Mastering the Head to Head https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/heads-up-poker/ Tue, 13 Aug 2024 14:20:14 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=41300 Heads Up Poker: What You Need to Know
  • Heads Up poker is a thrilling form casino game played between just two players, requiring a unique strategy and understanding of your opponent’s tendencies.
  • Position is paramount in Heads Up poker. The player on the button acts first pre-flop but last post-flop, creating strategic implications.
  • The range of poker hands you play should be wider in Heads Up poker. Even hands considered weak in full-ring games can be strong heads up.
  • Observing and adapting to your opponent’s patterns in video poker or at the casino and playing style is essential to success in a one-on-one match.
  • In Heads Up poker, aggression often pays off. Players need to be prepared to bet and raise frequently to exert pressure on their opponents.

Are you looking to play �C and master �C heads up poker? You��re in the right place. Brace yourself for one of the purest, most iconic, and volatile forms of No Limit Texas Hold ��Em.

How to Play Heads Up Poker: The Basics

To get started with the poker table positions:

  • Place a ��button�� marker in front of one player. This can be any object �� an empty deck of cards box, a cup, an eraser, a lucky rabbit��s foot. As long as it��s easily visible to both players, you can use it as your button.
  • The button player will act as the ��small blind��. Player two will act as the ��big blind.��
  • If the game is $1/$2 for example, the player on the button would pay $1 and their opponent would pay $2 before any of the cards are dealt.
  • The button player acts first preflop, and the big blind acts last post flop.
  • Rotate the button each hand.

What is The Difference Between Heads Up Poker And Ring Games

The main differences between heads up and ring games are as follows. Typical ��ring games�� will have a full table of players. (Online poker tables are usually six-handed and live casinos generally seat 8 or 9 players per table.)

Because you are not waiting for an entire table of people to make their decisions, heads up poker is much faster. You will see many more hands when you play heads up than when you are in a full ring game. Strategically, ring games require patience. Heads up requires aggression.

Breaking Down the Poker Jargon

��The button player acts first preflop, and big blind acts last postflop�� �� huh? What does this mean?

I��ll simplify the poker jargon for you. Here��s an example.

  1. You and your friend are playing $0.25/$0.50 heads up poker.
  2. You are on the button which is always simultaneously the small blind and pay $0.25.
  3. Your friend in the big blind pays $0.50.
  4. You are each dealt your two private hole cards face-down. In this scenario, you are dealt a fantastic pair of aces!
  5. You raise to $1.50.
  6. Your friend calls the $1.50. Since they already have $0.50 invested, they only need to contribute $1.00 more.
  7. The flop �� three public, face-up community cards �� is dealt. In this case, the flop reveals: 2?6?A?
  8. Wow! You��ve hit three-of-a-kind! But it��s your friend��s turn first. You must wait for them to make a decision. Your friend opts to check (no bet).
  9. Now it��s your turn. You bet $2.00.
  10. Your friend folds.

Do you see how you made the first decision before the cards were dealt? But after the cards were dealt, it was your friend��s turn first? This is the sequence of heads up poker�� and then you rotate positions after the completion of the hand.

image for the article on heads up poker

Image Credit: Kitreel/Shutterstock

Practicing Your Heads Up Poker Skills

What if you��re thinking, ��Help! I��m still lost!�� or ��I don��t have any friends!�� Don��t fear �� technology is here.

Free video poker is a great way to practice and learn how to play heads up poker without worrying about all the set-up, sequencing, and positioning. The apps will take care of that for you.

I highly recommend beginners start digitally when possible. A computer will deal cards at least 3x faster than a human, so you will master the gameplay mechanics at a much higher speed. You also don��t need to waste brain space on small blind/big blind logistics. These come much more intuitively when cards are automatically dealt to you and this prevent confusing mistakes.

Even if you have a friend who is excited for two player poker, you may still want to start by playing versus each other on video poker. Shuffling cards and counting bets manually gets old quickly.

Why is Heads Up Poker Strategy More Aggressive?

Good question �� let��s explain this conceptually. When you are seated at a table with eight other players, there is a good chance someone has been dealt a very good hand. Perhaps even two people have. Or three. There is a high likelihood that your hand will be beat. Again, you need to best all the other players.

Compare this to when you play heads up, where you are only faced with one opponent. Is it more or less likely your hand will win?

Much more likely. Why? The reason is that you only need to beat one player as opposed to eight players.

How Does This Impact Your Poker Strategy?

Since it��s less likely to have been dealt the worst hand before the flop, you can adjust by playing a wider variety of cards. As it��s less likely for either of you to have made a very strong hand after the flop, you can call bluffs more often and bluff more yourself.

As a theoretical example, you should generally not try to bluff five people. Someone is bound to have a very strong holding. But bluffing one person? That is a much easier task. In heads up, you only need to convince one person to fold as opposed to an entire table.

Image Credit: Vlasov Yevhenii/Shutterstock

What is a ��Good Hand�� in Heads Up Poker?

Even though the heads up poker rules are still the same, what qualifies as a ��good hand�� differs wildly.

Building upon the section above, if you want to defeat, let��s say, three opponents, you need to feel pretty confident in your holding. You need to have really strong cards that can best multiple people.

When playing heads up, however, a measly pair is often a pretty good hand. You only need to best one other person, and their cards might not have hit anything. This means the definition of a strong hand changes. Something as simple as a pair is often good enough to beat one random hand, but rarely good enough to beat several.

A Casino Game is Not Your Home Game

A cautionary tale �� before you learn how to play poker in heads up format. Many people start learning how to play poker by practicing in a two player format with their family or friends �� then they go to a casino and get torn apart. They are dumbfounded as to how they keep losing.

This is because what constitutes a good hand has changed. Yes, a high pair or three-of-a-kind will probably win against your dad or sibling when playing one-on-one. But don��t be surprised when you go to a casino betting on your pair of kings �� only to find your opponents flipping over straights and flushes.

Beware of learning how to play head up poker as your starting point because the threshold for a good hand is much lower. What is good enough to win against two or three players will likely not cut it versus a big group. Keep this in mind when you transition from playing heads up at your kitchen table to live at the casino.

Why Should You Learn to Play Heads Up Poker?

I hope I��ve sufficiently scared you in the previous section. Too many people lose their money and have a terrible first time transitioning to a casino because their idea of relative hand strength is skewed. They ��overvalue�� their hands.

For this reason, I actually recommend beginners do not start by playing heads up. You can use those same apps, computer programs, and online casinos to practice playing full ring poker at home. Should you even learn to play heads up poker at all? Honestly, it depends.

If your ambition is to play recreational home games or cash games at a casino, learning how to play heads up poker may do you more harm than good. Heads up poker reinforces bad habits and false feedback that too many hands are valuable when they��re not. Playing heads up poker may lure you into a false sense of security where you overvalue your relative hand strength.

Image Credit: Vlasov Yevhenii/Shutterstock

The Benefits of Learning Heads Up Poker

There are just three major reasons why I would recommend playing heads up:

  1. People skills: Since you are only battling against one other person, you are more able to capture a ��tell�� or get a read. (This includes playing online by the way �� even when you cannot visually see your opponent, timing tells do exist.) Heads up poker can sharpen your ability to read another and maintain your own poker face.
  2. Creativity and bluff frequency: If you��re nervous about playing poker and the idea of bluffing makes your stomach drop, then heads up is a great way to practice. The lower likelihood of your opponent having a strong hand encourages you to play more creatively and make bold moves. Bluffing heads-up is less risky than in a full-ring game due to fewer players potentially holding strong hands.
  3. Tournaments: If you intend to play poker tournaments, you need to know how to play heads up. Tournaments play down to a winner ��- when the field narrows to the final few players, you want to be comfortable playing in the bluffier, looser style in order to close the deal.

Taking Advantage of Heads Up Insecurities

Many local casinos have daily tournaments which will usually not play down to a winner. Instead, the players will propose a ��chop�� �� dividing the winnings proportionately by chip stack. For example, the person with the biggest stack will earn close to the first place payout.

Most players will favor a chop deal because they are afraid to play heads up. You can exploit this. They will likely not have experience or confidence in playing heads up poker. Just knowing the two basic strategic principles will give you a huge advantage:

  1. Play more hands: You are much more likely to have a good hand when faced with fewer opponents.
  2. Bluff more frequently: Your opponent is much less likely to have a hand good enough to call you with.

Lowering your threshold of what constitutes a good hand underlines all heads up strategy.

Also keep in mind that when someone proposes a chop, it��s not decided by a majority vote. Everyone at the final table could vote in favor of a chop except one person ��- and the deal is off. It only takes one objection. Since so many people are insecure about playing heads up, you can use this to your advantage.

Win Without Actually Playing

I once found myself at the final table of a daily poker tournament at a local casino. With six players remaining, I was fourth in chips. The others suggested an ‘ICM’ chop, offering me a payout close to fourth place. I countered that I was happy to agree to a chop�� if I was offered second-place prize money.

They laughed, then they screamed. They were furious �� how could I propose such a thing? How could I be so audacious? Well, I knew that their eagerness to make a deal and resistance to playing heads up was something I could use to my advantage. A few minutes later, they reluctantly agreed.

Their fear of playing heads up and my confidence in the format allowed me to successfully drive a hard bargain, and secure a juicy second place prize.

image for the article on heads up poker

Image Credit: Blezzer/Shutterstock

Final Strategy Shift: The Math Changes

We now know that everything in heads up poker strategy is driven by the fact that it��s less likely you��re up against a strong hand. This means you should play more hands and bluff more frequently. Since your opponent will likely employ the same heads up poker strategy changes, you might want to call down their bets lighter.

You also need to be aware that the math shifts too.

When you play heads up, you want to avoid chasing too many draws like flushes or straights. The reason why is that your ��pot odds�� are almost always going to be worse.

An Example of The Math Changing

Let��s say someone bets $10 and four people call. There is now $50 in the middle just from the flop round alone, and you are faced with a decision with a flush draw. Should you call the $10? Absolutely �� you are calling $10 to win a pot of what will be over $60 (their $50 bets + your $10 + any preflop money). That��s a great price!

A flush draw will complete around 36% of the time �� so you��re getting great odds to draw. (Read more on poker probabilities in my cheat sheets here or purchase my book A Girl��s Guide to Poker.)

Since more people participated in the hand, there��s more money in the middle. You are thereby more incentivized to ��chase�� your big draw. Because if you win, you will 6x your money! That should entice you to take the 36% gamble!

But now let��s say you��re playing heads up, and your opponent has bet $10. You now have to call $10 to win a pot that so far totals maybe a little over $20 (their $10 + your $10 + preflop bets). A 2x return on your money isn��t as appealing as a 6x return now, is it? In this case, the 36% gamble doesn��t look as fun at all.

Instead focus on ��made hands�� that are already completed rather than draws. Because, hey, as you now know, when you play heads up poker, even a pair can be pretty good.

]]>
What is Big 2? How To Master the Rules of This Amazing Card Game https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/big-2-card-game/ Tue, 06 Aug 2024 13:48:16 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=41253 In a Big 2 card game, your objective is to get rid of all of your cards before any other players. A standard game of Big 2 is played between 4 participants. Each round the player has a hand of 13 cards, and �C as you may have guessed �C the highest-ranking card value is the humble 2.

The Essentials

  • The aim of the Big 2 card game is to get rid of all your cards as fast as possible. Popular across Asia, this easy-to-learn card game uses common poker hands and is similar to other card-shedding games like President or Crazy Eights.
  • The game is called Big 2 because the 2 is the highest ranked card, taking the place of the Ace in most poker hands. The Chinese name (Choh Dai Di) translates directly as ‘Big Old Two‘.
  • Big 2 game turns start of the lead player laying a single card or a poker hand. The other players take turns ‘shedding’ higher ranking variations of that hand until no more cards can be shed. The player who played the highest hand then plays the first hand of the round.
  • The game ends when one player has no cards and scores a perfect zero. The other players lose points based on how many cards they have in their hands. The aim of the game is to keep your score as low as possible.

How to Play The Big 2 Card Game: The Basics

The Big 2 card game is a complex game that has multiple options and gameplay elements. You can learn how to play Big 2 by following the standard round gameplay below:

  • Shedding: Players can choose to ��shed�� cards. This is the main point of Big 2, as the goal is to shed all your cards before other players. You can shed cards based on hand rankings, but only one time per turn. This is why it is important that you know the hand rankings you can shed when you learn how to play Big 2 (see the next section in this guide).
  • Leading: The ��Lead�� is essentially the player who sheds first. All cards that are shed will go into a communal pile. When no more players can shed, the pile is removed, and a new pile starts. This time, the last player to shed will become the Lead.
  • Climbing: When shedding to the pile, players must improve the ranking of the previous shed. This is known as the ��Climb��, as the next cards on the pile will always rank higher than the previous cards. For example, you could play a Pair (6? 6?) on a lower pair (4? 4?). Players cannot go over a leading combination. So, if the previous shed was a single, you can only ��Climb�� by adding a higher-ranking single.

Gameplay now continues with players shedding cards or passing when they cannot shed. This will happen until the first player sheds all their cards and wins the round. If the players continue in subsequent rounds, the remaining three players will have penalty points for the cards they have left in their hands.

When learning how to play Big 2, the first step is understanding the value of cards. The game jumbles traditional hand values you know when then you learn the poker rules.

After the 2, the next highest ranking cards are A, K, Q, J, 10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3. However, Big 2 also ranks suits, with Spades being the most valuable, followed by Hearts, Clubs, and Diamonds (?>?>?>?).

How to Set up a Big 2 Game

Each Big 2 card game starts with the deal. This is also the most complex part of the game, but luckily, a Big 2 online poker game will handle the deal automatically. In online live dealer games will be the house, and in casual games offline, the dealer is chosen at random. Cards are dealt counter-clockwise to all players.

Once all cards from a standard 52-card deck (13 to each player) have been dealt, the round will begin. Big 2 card game rules state that the player who first receives their cards will take the first turn and have the chance to shed cards. Some Big 2 card game variants may start the gameplay with the player with the lowest card ranking.

Card hand image for Big 2 Card Game article.

Image credit: Ramosh Artworks/Shutterstock

Big 2 Card Combinations: What is a Winning Hand?

Card combinations in Big 2 allow you to shed cards more quickly. Known as melds, the combinations can be put onto the pile if they are leading the previous shed. The highest value suit of any combination will dictate the overall suit.

Below are the most common combinations:

COMBINATIONEXAMPLERANK (LOW TO HIGH)
Singles3?Lowest
Doubles4? 4?Low
Triples6? 6? 6?Medium-Low
Snakes6? 7? 8? 9? 10?Medium
Flowers2? 3? Q? 6? K?Medium
GourdJ? J? J? 5? 5?Medium-High
Bomb7? 7? 7? 7?High
Straight Flush9? 10? J? Q? K?Highest
  • Singles: This is a single card according to its rank and suit.
  • Pairs/Doubles: A pair of cards of the same value. Doubles can be different suits, with the highest ranking suit covering the meld.
  • Three-Kinds/Triples: A combination of three cards with the same rank.
  • Straights/Snakes: Like the classic five-card poker hand made of card values in ascending order.
  • Flushes/Flowers: Five cards of the same suit but any rank.
  • Full House/Gourd: A five-card combination comprising a Pair and Triple.
  • Four-Kind/Bomb: Four cards of the same rank, with a fifth ��kicker�� card included as a single.
  • Straight Flush: As the best possible shedding meld, this is when five cards of the same suit are in ascending order of value.

Big 2 Scoring: Hand Ranking and How to Win

Importantly, in most situations, the Big 2 card game is played over multiple rounds in a points-based system. Whether the set score or time limit is met, the player with the best score will win the game. This is a losing points game, as there is no way to gain points, and 0 is a winning total.

If a player sheds all their cards, the remaining players are fined one penalty point for each remaining card they have.

There are also additional penalties. If you still have 10 to 12 cards in your hand, your penalty total will be doubled. 13 cards remaining means you could not shed one card throughout the round, and you will receive a tripled 39 penalty points.

Card hand image for Big 2 Card Game article.

Image credit: Ramosh Artworks/Shutterstock

The Big 2 Edge: Strategies to Outplay Your Opponents

Before you start playing Big 2, our experts have outlined a few of their top tips to help enhance your gameplay and potentially improve your chances of winning.

  • If you lead the pile, always discard/shed your highest-ranking combination first. It may be tempting to wait, but it is always best to shed your cards as soon as you can.
  • Leading the pile means you will control the combination for the whole game. If you play the highest possible first-shedding round, you could make it hard for other players to shed.
  • When you are not leading, try to gauge what your opponents have in their hands by looking closely at what cards they are shedding.

Advanced Big 2 Card Game Techniques

If you want to take your Big 2 gameplay to the next level, you may want to explore more advanced strategies. Because only one deck of cards is used, Big 2 is a game where it is reasonably possible to count cards. You��ll need a great memory, but you already know the cards you have, which means there are 41 other cards to track.

As gameplay progresses, you can see which cards your opponents are shedding. If you can track these cards, you will have a better idea of which cards are left. While knowing the cards left in play will not directly lead to you winning, it can help you make more informed decisions about when to shed or pass.

How to Gamble When Playing A Big 2 Card Game

As with any game that with a defined winner that plays in round, Big 2 can be gambled on. Gambling when playing Big 2 is common and very popular across Asia. Since the Chinese invented playing cards, its not surprising that they’ve got a long history of inventing amazing games and way to gamble on them.

Some of the different way in which you can gamble when playing Big 2 include:

  • Betting on who has the highest ranked poker hand in any round
  • Betting on the round winner
  • Betting on the overall winner
  • The losing player forfeiting money to the winning player based on how many cards they have left in their hand at the end of the game.

The Big 2 card game is available online but is admittedly not as common as other games. Even so, you can find online casino sites and other online platforms that allow you to play real money Big 2 from the comfort of your couch. This gives you the ability to play directly against another player in live dealer variants or virtually against a computer.

Big 2 Conquest: Triumphing with Skill and Strategy

Despite it seeming like a basic shedding game, the reason that Big 2 is so popular in Asia is because its simple to learn, but challenging to master. Once you have a good grasp of poker hands, you can employ advanced techniques like card counting to win.

However, while it makes for a perfect alterative to poker on gambling night, its just as fun as a relaxing card game with friends!

Title Image credit: Ramosh Artworks/Shutterstock

]]>
The F1 Las Vegas Grand Prix: Speed, Glamour, and Huge Controversy https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/f1-las-vegas/ Mon, 05 Aug 2024 08:47:27 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=41243 Years in the making, F1 racing roared back into Las Vegas in back in 2023, kicking off a ten-year contract between Formula 1 racing and Sin City.

It was rather an inglorious start, with lawsuits, exploding manhole covers and some people using the term Stripageddon to describe the nine-month makeover needed to build the track down the middle of Las Vegas Boulevard for more than a mile.

These disruptions and controversies have lead to general apathy, if not downright hostility from locals toward the upcoming 2024 F1 Las Vegas Grand Prix

Las Vegas F1: Brief History

More than 40 years ago, Caesars Palace, attempting to play on its luxury brand image, sought to bring F1 racing to a track behind its casino. Races were held in 1981 and 1982 but were poorly attended.

And worse, it did not draw the interest of the high-end gambling public Caesars had hoped to pique. The Caesar Palace Grand Prix went to CART racing for two years and then was disbanded altogether.

Hopes were higher for the Heineken Silver Las Vegas Grand Prix scheduled for 18 November 2023 and expected to see racecars hurtling down the world-famous Las Vegas Strip at more than 200mph.

This would also be the twenty-first and next to final race of the F1 2023 World Championship Series and was intended to draw fans from all over the world to Las Vegas.

image for f1 Las Vegas article

Image credit: Cristiano Barni/Shutterstock

Dual In The Desert

The F1 Las Vegas would be a night race in the desert winding through walls of neon casinos and was expected to present quite the spectacle. F1 spared no expense in making preparations, including buying a parking lot for pit and paddock functions outright with partner Liberty Media for $240 million and eventually spending more than $500 million on the completed Las Vegas Grand Prix Plaza near the Strip.

The layout’s design was handed over to Carsten Tilke and Tilke GMBH. It snakes through some of Las Vegas’s iconic features, including circling the new Sphere entertainment complex and a flat straight shot down Las Vegas Blvd., which saw Charles Leclerc hit a race speed record of 350.5 kph, or about 218mph during the event.

With 17 turns and a lap distance of about 6.2 kilometers or about 3.8 miles, the track was called “massively challenging�� by F1 racer Lewis Hamilton. George Russell was quoted as saying, “It’s good for racing, but maybe not the most exciting to drive”. Still, Oscar Piastri turned in a Las Vegas one-lap record of 1.35.4. With a total of 50 laps, however, drivers had a long Saturday night ahead of them.

Bright Lights And Big Money

As one might expect, many brands were eager to combine the excitement of Las Vegas and F1 racing with what they hoped would be well-heeled attendees from all over the world��even more so than the other F1 races in the US held in Miami and Austin.

The race sponsor, Heineken, was joined by American Express, Nieman Marcus, T-Mobile, Puma, and even Sports Illustrated, among many others. All held extravagant parties and hosted displays in the almost 300,000 square feet of hospitality space added just for the event.

The musical lineup for the Las Vegas F1 Grand Prix Opening ceremony on Wednesday, 15 November, included John Legend, Tiesto, Keith Urban, Journey, acts by Cirque Soliel, and many others, followed up with the official lighting show, which featured drones, fireworks, and lasers.

Among the many decadent event choices were a $5,000 per person dinner and whiskey tasting at Jean Georges in the Aria, a $1,000 and up ticket to see Kylie Minogue at the Amber lounge in the Venetian, or an extravagant invite-only after party on the 66th floor of Resorts World with DJ Pee.Wee.

Speaking of invite-only, Sotheby’s held a private auction at Wynn’s Awakening theater on the Friday before the race. They auctioned off several dozen cars, including a 2021 McLaren Elva and a 2008 Bugatti Veyron. But the star of the show was the very first 2013 Mercedes AMG Petronas driven by Lewis Hamilton in 14 F1 racing events in 2013. The winning bid was $18,815,000.

The F1 Vegas Car-tastrophe

Because it was a night race, the F1 Las Vegas schedule was a bit different as well. The three practice sessions were all scheduled for after dark since the race would start at 10 p.m.

The first was scheduled for Thursday from 8:30 to 9:30 p.m., and then a second one from 12:00 to 1:00 a.m. Then, on Friday, a final practice session was to be held from 8:30 to 9:30, with qualifying rounds from 12:00 to 1:00 a.m.

Only about eight minutes into the first practice session, those plans literally came to a screeching halt. Carlos Sainz, in his Ferrari, somehow hit a dislodged manhole cover, which tore apart huge parts of his car’s underbelly, leaving him stranded on the track.

Esteban Ocon also suffered damage to his car, forcing him to install a whole new chassis before the second practice began. In an abundance of caution, F1 stopped the practice and began discussions on how to fix the issue.

Unhappy Fans and Disappointed Drivers

But this was not a huge hit with fans, many of whom had spent tens of thousands of dollars on F1 Las Vegas tickets. The second practice, scheduled for midnight, was pushed back first to 12:30 a.m., then to 2:30 a.m. when the second practice finally got underway after more than 30 manhole covers were filled with sand or cemented more firmly into place.

With a tight deadline of 4 a.m. to hand the track back over to the city each morning and claiming to fear for fan safety, the Las Vegas Grand Prix CEO, Renee Wilm, and F1 President Stefano Domenicali made the tough decision to clear the track of spectators around 1:30 a.m.

Almost all had been cleared out by the beginning of the delayed second practice run, which has resulted in several lawsuits from those who purchased F1 Las Vegas Tickets to witness the Thursday Practice sessions.

Carlos Sainz, who, after replacing engine components as well as much of the body and chassis of his Ferrari, had his second-place qualifying spot dropped ten spots for a “penalty “for replacing said parts and ended up in sixth place overall, added insult to injury for many fans who felt race organizers were to blame for the necessary repairs in the first place.

Ultimately, Max Verstappen won the race at 1:29:08, followed closely by Charles Leclerc and Sergio Perez. But as it turned out, it wasn’t just the fans, Carlos Sainz and the Ferrari team that left the Las Vegas F1 race disappointed.

image for f1 Las Vegas article

Image credit: Cristiano Barni/Shutterstock

F1 Las Vegas: The Debacle in The Desert?

Media coverage of the event included words like embarrassing, nuisance, huge headache, and debacle in the desert. Even after the fans’ lawsuit was filed, lawsuits from casinos and local businesses are still incoming, claiming millions in lost revenues due to construction and traffic rerouting.

Many locals say they lost tip money and scheduled work hours due to construction and the arcane system of both pedestrian and vehicle bridges, which funneled traffic over and around the raceway as it was being built over the course of nine months and completely dried up business for some casinos and local businesses. These traffic headaches also tripled some worker’s commute times.

Clark County commissioners and Liberty Media, the event’s co-sponsors, have acknowledged the many issues around the Las Vegas 2023 inaugural race. However, they point to a $1.5 billion impact from the weekend event, including about $884 million in direct consumer spending by attendees, at a rate about 3.5 times more than the average Las Vegas visitor. Las Vegas F1 also created and maintained about 2,200 jobs over that nine-month build-out period.

Despite these seemingly huge benefit, the F1 Las Vegas lawsuits continue to roll in, with a new group of businesses set to sue Clarke County and the race promoter, Liberty Media. The basis of the new lawsuit is the same as the previous one brough by Ellis Island Casino, lost earnings due to the ongoing construction and the privatization of a colossal 3.8 miles of public roads in the Strip corridor for the track.

Las Vegas Convention Authority Under F1 Fire

In mid-summer 2024, the Las Vegas Review-Journal reported that the Las Vegas Convention Authority had given out more than $4 million in taxpayer money in the form of tickets to the 2023 F1 race. Some of these tickets had a face value of $15,000, and some recipients received as many as five.

While the bulk of these tickets went to customers of the Convention Authority, many others went to staff, influencers, sports stars, celebrities, and politicians. Four of those politicians were Clark County commissioners, who are now facing a complaint from the Nevada Ethics Commission.

This reporting and subsequent investigations have only deepened many Las Vegans’ concerns and complaints about the race.

Putting the Sparkle Back Into The F1

Despite controversies, lawsuits, ethics investigations and general malaise from those who live in the Las Vegas Valley, the F1 Race Las Vegas saga will probably continue through 2026 and likely through at least 2033 as F1 has a $500 million real estate investment it would like to see some return on.

However, they are already seeing some ticket package pricing like the Heineken GA+ slashed by more than 80%. And many Strip casinos have reportedly shaved room rates by more than 50%, and that is still many months out from the actual race.

In typical Las Vegas Grand Prix fashion, there is some confusion about whether or not the county commissioners even signed a contract to begin with. But attempting to turn back now would be a costly and litigious mess.

When Is  F1 Las Vegas 2024?

People wondering when is the F1 Las Vegas race is being held this year will be relieved to hear that tickets are on sale now for the race events from November 21st to November 23rd, with F1 promising cheaper tickets to try and draw in the crowds.

The F1 Las Vegas schedule of future races is for the weekend before the Thanksgiving Holiday for all upcoming years, should you wish to make plans.

It will once again attempt to showcase the luxury and opulence of Las Vegas with the excitement and energy of F1 against one of the most visually stunning backdrops in the entire world. Hopefully this time with all the lessons learned from the first year, it will be more spectacle and less sputter.

Title Image credit: Cristiano Barni/Shutterstock

]]>
What is ICM in Poker? How to Use ICM in Your Poker Strategy https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/icm-in-poker/ Wed, 31 Jul 2024 10:17:34 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=41199 What Is ICM: How to Use it in Your Poker Games
  • ICM, or Independent Chip Model, is a mathematical model used in poker to calculate a player’s overall equity in a tournament.
  • The model is essential in tournament play, especially during final table and bubble play, where it helps calculate the real monetary value of a player’s chip stack.
  • ICM considers factors such as the total chips in play, the payout structure, and the player’s current chip stack to calculate the expected payout or equity.
  • Understanding and utilizing the ICM can greatly influence strategies, particularly when deciding whether to risk one’s tournament life.
  • While ICM is a valuable tool in decision-making, it also has limitations and doesn’t account for variables such as player skill levels and blinds. Use it as part of a broader strategic framework.

If you play poker tournaments, either online or at your local casino, it’s crucial to understand poker ICM, or the Independent Chip Model. While it might sound like technical jargon, knowing ICM poker strategies �C and what does ICM mean for your poker strategy �C is incredibly valuable.

Let me explain.

How is The Independent Chip Model Used in Poker Tournaments?

The first thing you need to know about ICM poker is that it only applies to tournaments and online poker tournaments. Not cash games.

When you��re playing poker, you want to ask yourself what is the best decision mathematically. Am I getting a good price to complete my flush draw? Straight draw? Gutshot? Do I think I likely have the best poker hand? When you��re playing a poker tournament, however, you want to ask yourself two questions:

  • What is the best mathematical decision I can make?
  • How will this decision impact my position in the tournament?

It��s the second question that changes everything �C and gets to the heart of ICM poker model.

For example, let��s say you��re getting excellent pot odds to draw for a flush. The math tells you to call, even if it��s for your entire stack. In a cash game, you should always take this opportunity because you can profitably win money; if you miss your flush draw, you can easily rebuy.

Now let��s say you��re a big stack in a poker tournament or online poker tournament and there are only five people left. According to the ICM model in poker, you would not want to take this opportunity because it would jeopardize your position.

The chips you would lose are worth more than the chips you would gain. Said another way, the benefit of going from second or third in chips to first in chips is not worth the risk of elimination.

What is ICM in Poker?

ICM means adjusting your decision-making to your ranking in the tournament rather than the value of your hand.

Here��s another crazy example.

  • Imagine there are three people left in an online casino poker tournament.
  • You��re tied for the chip-lead. The person in third place is very short-stacked.
  • Your fellow big stack goes all-in �� and you look down at a shiny pair of pocket jacks.

What do you do here?

  • In a normal three-player cash game, you would almost always call. It��s highly unlikely your opponent has a better hand than you, especially with so few players.
  • But in a poker tournament where you need to factor in poker ICM, you should fold.

Why? Because even if you have a better hand than your opponent, it��s not worth the risk. Perhaps they have Ace-Ten, where you��re a nearly 70% favorite. Or a pair of threes, where your equity is closer to 80 percent. Doesn��t matter. The 20-30% of the time that they will outdraw you poses too great a threat to your chip stack.

Woman playing poker for the ICM in poker article.

Image Credit: Kitreel/Shutterstock

A Real Life Example of Extreme ICM

I once put someone to the ultimate poker ICM test. I was at the final two tables of a $350 tournament, fewer than 20 people remained. First prize was over $30,000. I was second place in chips.

Only one person had more chips than me �� had me ��covered�� �� and he raised preflop. I called with a pair of nines. The player in the big blind was a short-stack and went-all in. The then chip-leader called.

I decided to go all-in to isolate the short-stack, figuring my pair of nines could likely beat one player but would struggle against two.

The chip leader was outraged, visibly distressed, and asked for an exact count of my stack. We were incredibly close. After someone called ‘time’ on him, he finally called�� with pocket aces.

Why the hesitation? With a pair of aces?! Because of ICM. Even though he was an 80% favorite against almost any hand I had, it was still an enormous risk. Eighty percent of the time, he would win the pot and increase his chip lead. But 20% of the time, he would finish with just over a min-cash and a meager profit margin.

Mathematically, he should always call. But ICM poker made him think twice.

Strategies For Utilizing Poker ICM

Short stack IMC poker strategy

Since you don��t have much to lose, you can play more freely and aggressively. When you��re low on chips, ICM poker doesn��t really apply since there is no ��expected payout value�� to deserve.

Medium stack IMC poker strategy

you need to keep an eye on stack sizes at all times. If you��re at a final table and in the middle of the pack, it would be a disaster to get eliminated before a short stack. You have to play much tighter in hopes that a smaller stack will bust �� earning you a higher payout.

Big stack IMC poker strategy

big stacks can apply great pressure on middle stacks according to ICM poker. The middle stacks still have a lot to lose so you can ��bully�� them by presenting tough decisions. A middle stack might fold a strong poker hand, such as as pocket queens if a micro short stack is about to bust.

So as a big stack, you can shove wide. Just be cautious when it comes to tangling with other big stacks �� you want to tread those waters carefully and generally avoid.

What is the Major Drawback of ICM Poker Analysis?

As you can see from my real life example, an ICM poker analysis made what would usually be a slam-dunk easy decision a close call. It changes the math.

In detailed ICM analysis, a computer calculates your decision �� factoring in payout considerations. Advanced programs can, in fact, adjust your decision based on your current ranking. Truly adhering to ICM means following the math adjusted for your tournament standing, but in everyday play, it involves prioritizing the potential for larger pay jumps over the immediate strength of your hand.

The ICM poker model generally encourages more conservative play, focusing on avoiding short-term swings to achieve bigger payouts.

However, the granular Independent Chip Model approach is unrealistic for most players. Humans can��t process these decisions quickly (it’s hard enough to learn basic poker probabilities). Calculating whether you should call an all-in with Ace-King based on your tournament position is nearly impossible for most people. In practice, you might fold Ace-King due to ��ICM pressure,�� aiming to avoid variance and maintain your chip lead.

ICM Poker Doesn’t Take Into Account the Human Factor

Another drawback of strict ICM analysis is that it doesn’t account for the human factor. Some players are tighter and bluff less than a computer might assume. (Computers tend to overestimate bluff frequencies.)

Your decision to call or fold will also depend on your ��reads�� and ability to spot tells. Someone born before 1945 might jam a smaller percentage of hands than a younger player, but computers don’t incorporate a senior citizen discount.

Customizing ranges in computer applications called ��solvers�� can help, but emulating this on the fly is extremely impractical and overall unnecessary.

As long as you weigh your standing in the tournament against your actual hand, you are already taking Independent Chip Model poker into consideration.

ICM Poker Demystified: Elevating Your Game With Strategic Insights

Understanding what is ICM in poker tournaments can increase your chances of winning by reducing risks. It involves adjusting your decisions based on your poker tournament position rather than just the value of your hand.

While mastering ICM Poker can lead to better choices �� you can even study and memorize computer outputs �� it’s also important to balance the math with the practical realities of live play and human decision-making.

Title image Credit: Kitreel/Shutterstock

]]>
Which Countries Have The Most Gold Olympics Medals? https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/most-gold-medals/ Tue, 30 Jul 2024 14:22:47 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=41351 Who has the most Olympic gold medals and will they be adding to their tally during the 2024 Summer Olympics. Let’s find out!

Who Has The Most Gold Medals? The Essentials

  • The USA is the country widely predicted to earn the most gold medals at the Olympics at the 2024 Summer Olympics. They are also the country with the most gold medals at a whopping 1061!
  • The current host of the Summer Olympics is France, who are expected to leverage the home field advantage to come third, adding to their excising tally of 223 Olympic gold medals.
  • The UK is also a good bet to win at least one gold medal. They’ve taken home 284 since the beginning of the modern games and are the only country to have won at least one gold in every games since they restarted in 1896.
  • In this guide, we’ll look at which country has the most Olympic gold medals by country and if they look set to earn more.

After a grand (and somewhat rainy) opening ceremony, the Paris 2024 Olympics are officially underway. There are more than 200 countries competing in this year��s celebration, each athlete representing the absolute pinnacle of sporting success in their country.

However, of the thousands of world-class athletes competing, only the very best can win an Olympic gold medal and claim their rightful place on the coveted podium.

The Olympic Games instill a sense of national pride like no other event can. So, we��re here to answer the one question on everybody��s mind: which country will win the highest number of Olympic medals at the Olympics?

Most Olympic Gold Medals by County

USA: Number of Gold Olympic Medals: 1061

In a forecast that��s surprising to nobody, the USA is predicted to bring home the highest number of Olympic medals for the fourth consecutive year. The US continuously performs well across the table, including in athletics, swimming, gymnastics, diving, basketball, tennis, wrestling, and shooting. This is largely due to the enormous pool of athletes in its 50 states.

Michael Phelps is the athlete with the most Olympic gold medals. The US swimmer holds the world record for winning Olympic gold medals with huge tally of 23.

Team USA��s star-studded lineup features not one but two (at least) strong contenders in many of its sports. Simone Biles and Sunisa Lee (gymnastics), LeBron James and Steph Curry (basketball), Sha��Carri Richardson and Noah Lyles (100m), Katie Ledecky and Caleb Dressel (swimming), and Caitlin Simmers and Carissa Moore (surfing) are some of the top US athletes to watch in the 2024 Olympics.

The USA is also a firm favorite among bettors, with sportsbooks offering specials like Noah Lyles to win gold and set a new Olympic record. 

China: Number of Olympic Gold Medals: 263

In second place behind the US, China is forecast to win the most gold medals at the Olympics this year. China is the leading country for the number of table tennis, badminton, and trampoline gymnastics medals.

However, the highest number of total medals per sport comes from diving (81 total, 47 golds), artistic gymnastics (69 total, 29 golds), and shooting (67 total, 26 golds).

China��s female athletes are forecast to dominate in their sports, with Wu Yanni (100m hurdles), Sun Yingsha (table tennis), Qun Hongchan (diving), Huang Yuting (shooting), and Zheng Qinwen (tennis) all highly anticipated to go for the gold. Shi Zhiyong (weightlifting) and Shi Yuqi (badminton) are also expected to shine on the Olympic stage.

Not only are China��s individual athletes looking to secure a place on the podium, but its team events are anticipated to score well, too. The men��s and women��s synchronized diving teams – Lian Junjie & Yang Hao and Chen Yiwen & Chang Yani, respectively – and the shooting duo Huang Yuting & Sheng Lihao are forecast to take the gold.

France: Number of Olympic Gold Medals: 264

Proud host of this year��s Olympic games, France is predicted to perform well on home turf. So well, in fact, that many sportsbooks are predicting a third-place win for the highest number of gold medals and sixth place for the overall number of medals.

After scoring 2x gold medals in Tokyo 2020, Clarisse Agb��gn��nou is a serious contender for the judo Olympic gold. Also favored by the sportsbooks are Sara Balzer (fencing), M��lanie De Jesus Dos Santos (artistic gymnastics), Antoine Dupont (rugby sevens), Teddy Riner (judo), and L��on Marchand (swimming).

Sportsbooks are also betting on the French teams to do well, with the women��s handball team the clear favorite across betting platforms. Both the men��s and women��s handball teams won gold in Tokyo, so it��s hardly a surprise that France is currently the leading Olympic country in the sport.

image for most gold medals article

Image Credit: Flashpict/Shutterstock

Australia: Number of Olympic Gold Medals: 164

Australia has competed in every modern summer Olympics since Athens in 1896 and brought home at least one medal every time, so it��s hardly surprising that they��re forecast to score well across the table. The Aussie team has athletes competing in almost every Olympic event, barring only handball, fencing, and volleyball. 

Swimming is Australia��s most recurrently successful sport. This year, its 45-strong team of Dolphins looks set to win again, featuring top athletes like Ariarne Titmus, Kaylee McKeown, Emma McKeon, and Elijah Winnington. Jessica Fox is also predicted to place in the canoe slalom event, while Grace Brown competes for the top spot in road cycling.

Great Britain: Number of Olympic Gold Medals: 284

Though smaller in size than top competitors like the US and Australia, Great Britain is a serious contender for the most gold medals by country at Paris 2024. GB has competed in every modern Olympics since its inception and – as of the 2020 games – is currently third in the all-time Summer Olympics medal table, both by the number of golds and the overall tally of medals won. Great Britain is also the only country to have won at least one gold every year.

Tom Daley (diving), Andy Murray (tennis), Helen Glover (rowing), Max Whitlock (gymnastics), and Adam Peaty (swimming) are part of GB��s ��golden generation��: Olympic legends who have come out of (or are extremely close to) retirement for one final swipe at the gold medal.

Other top contenders include GB��s youngest-ever Olympian Sky Brown (skateboarding), first-ever female weightlifting medalist Emily Campbell, and Sports Personality of the Year favorite Keely Hodgkinson (800m).

Japan: Number of Olympic Gold Medals: 169

The ongoing effects of the COVID-19 pandemic meant that Japan��s turn to host the 2020 Olympics, which were postponed until 2021, wasn��t quite the large-scale operation it had envisaged. Nonetheless, the nation celebrated its most successful Olympics so far and arrived in Paris ready to fight for a spot at the table once more (and doing so in front of a much larger crowd).

Akari Fujinami hasn��t lost a wrestling match since she was in junior high, while Misaki Emura is hoping to win Japan��s first gold medal in fencing after coming first in the International Fencing Federation World Rankings. Competing in BMX freestyle, Rim Nakamura is aiming to become Japan��s first podium winner in an Olympic cycling event, while Shigeyuki Nakarai, better known as Shigekix, hopes to become the first male breaking champion in the history of the festival. 

Other top competitors include Daiki Hashimoto (gymnastics), Hina Hayata (table tennis), Haruka Kitaguchi (athletics), Tatsuru Saito (judo), Keisei Tominaga (basketball), and siblings Hijumi and Uta Abe (judo).

Netherlands: Number of Olympic Gold Medals: 95

Paris 2024 sees the Netherlands�� largest number of competing athletes in the country��s Olympic history. With a grand total of 276 athletes – 47 of whom are competing in track and field events – the Netherlands is hoping to build on the 36 medals won in Tokyo, eight of which were won in a single day.

Boasting numerous European champions in events like rowing, cycling, hockey, and athletics, the Netherlands is predicted to win over a dozen gold medals in Paris. Track and field athletes Femke Bol and Sifan Hassan, alongside cyclists Mathieu van der Poel and Harrie Lavreysen and shot putters Jessica Schilder and Jorinde van Klinken, are among the Netherlands�� top contenders for a gold medal.

Canada: Number of Olympic Gold Medals: 71

Paris 2024 is only Canada��s 29th appearance in the Olympic games, but it has performed consistently and successfully enough to earn a spot in the list of the 10 top-performing countries. Canada brings 315 athletes to the Olympic games, hoping to take a place on the podium in 31 events.

Summer McIntosh, who made her Olympic swimming debut at the age of 14, is returning to the Olympic games following a year of world record-breaking swims. Canada��s Olympians with the most gold medals, Andre De Grasse and Penny Oleksiak, are hoping to build on the six and seven medals they won across their first two Olympics, respectively. 

Eleanor Harvey (fencing), Aaron Brown (track and field), Josh Liendo (swimming), Bianca Andreescu (tennis), Katie Vincent (sprint canoe), Brian Yang (badminton), Melissa Humana-Paredes and Brandie Wilkerson (beach volleyball), and Fay De Fazio Ebert (skateboarding) are also favored to score well.

image for most gold medals article

Image Credit: Inspiring Team/Shutterstock

Germany: Number of Olympic Gold Medals: 201

Germany consistently ranks within the top 10 performing Olympic countries. In fact, it has remained within this list for the last 21 consecutive summer Olympics, though it has yet to clinch the very top spot.

Basketball player Dennis Schr?der is expected to lead the team to victory, having played in the NBA since 2013 (most recently with the New York Nets). Long jumper Malaika Mihambo, despite a recent COVID-19 infection, is returning to Paris to defend her Tokyo gold, while rising star and German champion Lukas M?rtens hopes to secure the gold in his Olympic debut.

Angelique Kerber and Alexander Zverev (tennis), Timo Boll (table tennis), and Isabell Werth (dressage) are all looking to add to their Olympic medal collection, and the men��s basketball, women��s football, and men��s handball teams are predicted to score well.

Republic of Korea Number of Olympic Gold Medals: 96

Paris 2024 will be the Republic of Korea��s 19th Summer Olympics appearance after winning six gold, four silver, and ten bronze medals in the rescheduled Tokyo Olympics. The Republic has long been the undisputed champion of Olympic archery and repeatedly scores well in combat sports events like taekwondo, judo, and wrestling.

The women��s archery team of Jeon Hun-young, Lim Si-hyeon, and Nam Su-hyeon is predicted to bring home the Republic of Korea��s 10th consecutive gold. On the other hand, individual shooting athletes Ban Hyo-jin, Oh Ye-jin, and Kim Ye-ji are expected to finish at the top of the leaderboard. Oh Sang-uk (fencing) and Kim Woo-min (swimming) are also forecast to perform well in their events.

Title Image Credit: Shutterstock

]]>
What Are Slot Tournaments and How Do You Win Big at One? https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/what-are-slot-tournaments/ Tue, 30 Jul 2024 13:07:56 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=41187 Slot tournaments is a casino competition between players, either in a real-world casino, or online, where a group of players compete against each other playing casino slot machines in order to win the designated prize, or rewards.

There are different kinds of slot tournaments, some with many players playing against each other, down to where only a few players play. Entry is by means of a fee, called the buy-in, and this may be for cash, or tokens, or offered for free by the casino to their premium players, or to attract new players to their games.

How Do Competitive Slot Tournaments Work?

In a real-world casino, a section of the casino slot floor is roped off and designated as the tournament area. This area contains special slot machines, called tournament slots, which can be either specifically-designed slot machines for tournaments only, or standard casino slots, but these have been equipped with a new program for play, which is called tournament mode.

What Is Tournament Mode?

In any casino, real-world or online, each type and kind of slot machine has a computer program inside its brain which tells the machine how to play the game which is selected by the player, or which is housed in that slot machine cabinet.

If one of these regular slot machines is selected to become part of slot tournament play, it��s internal program is changed from its regular play programming into what is called tournament mode. This is a special configuration which plays and pays differently to the way that the machine would normally play and pay.

Usually this means that while in tournament mode, the game will pay much more often and with much bigger pays. ?

Special Designated Tournament Slots

There are also specially-designated and built slot machines specifically for slot tournaments. for example, the slot machine manufacturer EVERI have a system called tourn-event, which is a designated bank of slots which are specifically configured to play only slot tournaments. ?

How Does A Slot Tournament Machine Work?

The principles are the same as all traditionally-available slot machines. Since most of these machines now use play buttons to initiate play �C instead of the more traditional handle pulls �C these tournament machines also work that way.

Players play them the same way, ?by pressing the play button as fast as they can to accumulate as many credits and wins as possible in the allocated time.

Slot machines for what is a slot tournament article.

How To Get Into A Slot Tournament?

There are a number of different ways in which you can play in a slot tournament. The most common is to buy an entry, which is called the buy-in. The amount of this varies considerably from tournament to tournament, and from casino to casino. This can also be different with online slots, where the number of participating players is not limited by the space required to house the machines, as is the case in a real-world casino.

In most casinos, the standard buy-in for a slot tournament is usually about $25. But this can be as much as $1,000 per entry, and even more. I have played in such tournaments in the past where the entry was at least $1,000, and in some cases up to $10,000 per entry. But in general, the most that today��s casinos will charge for an entry will be about $100.

Free Entry For Slot Tournaments

On some occasions, players can often also enter a slot tournament for free! That��s because many casinos use slot tournaments either as a reward for their regular and premium players, but also to attract new players to their casino.

So, if you are already a regular player, you may get an invitation to a slot tournament with free entries for yourself and your spouse, or significant other. Or if you are new to the casino, you may get an offer in the mail, or text, or email, offering you a free entry, or perhaps a 2-for-1, and so on.

And finally, you can often also use your player reward points to enter the slot tournament. If you are a regular player at this casino, and use your player��s club card for your play, you will be accumulating bonus points which can then be used for a variety of extra benefits and bonuses. and entries into slot tournaments are often part of these rewards, which you will be able to access through the player��s club in your favorite casino.

How To Win A Slot Tournament?

Slot tournaments have different pay structures, depending on which kind of tournament this is If it��s what��s called a free-roll tournament, this means that entry into it is for free, and therefore the prizes which will be won may not be in cash, but perhaps in other types of gifts. the most common of this is to win free play credits, which are then added to your player��s club card account.

You can then use these as cash for your favorite regular casino slot machines. This you can do by inserting your player��s club card into the machine��s card reader, enter your pin, and then select free play credits from the menu, and then choose how many to add to that machine��s credit meter.

You can��t cash out these free play credits, but whatever you win by using them is yours, and this means that you can cash out these wins in real money.

Cash Reward Slot Tournaments

Most casino slot tournaments �C as well as those online which require a cash buy-in �C will have a tournament winners structure posted, and this will show how much each player will win if they reach those levels.

For most slot tournaments this will be usually be the top three players �C and these will be those players who have accumulated the highest total of accumulated tournament credits throughout all of the rounds of the tournament.

These prizes are almost always in cash, and the amount of that cash will depend on whether of not this is a slot tournament which pays a percentage of the total entries for each prize, or if this is a slot tournament with a fixed prize structure.

Fixed Prize Structure for Slot Tournaments

A fixed prize structure means that the listed awards for the winners will have a specifically-designated amount. For example, most such slot tournaments will have, say, $1,000 as first prize, with $500 as the second prize, and $250 as the third place prize. These are the most common fixed prize structure pay scales which you will find in standard casino slot tournaments.

In many cases these types of tournaments will also offer consolation prizes as several runner-up prizes, and these can be either buffet coupons, or show coupons, or gifts, or perhaps a coffee mug, or some other type of thank you award for those who bought into the tournament, but did not win the major cash prizes.

Percentage Participation Prize Structure for Slot Tournaments

A percentage prize participation structure means that in this type of slot tournament the amount of the winning prizes will depend on how many players entered with their buy-in. This, therefore, means that the actual cash amount of the prizes will depend on the number of players who entered the tournament, and not on a fixed prize amount.

The value of the final cash awards in these percentage participation tournaments is decided by the percentage value of each award.

The advantage of these types of slot tournaments is that the more players who buy-in, the bigger the prizes will be, and, therefore, the more places will also be paid. in these tournaments the total amount of the buy-ins is called the prize pool, and it is from this that the stated percentages will be paid to the winners.

Image credit: eskystudio/Shutterstock

What are the Different Types of Slot Tournaments?

We have already mentioned some of the types of slot tournaments which are popular with casino players, both in real-world casinos, as well as in online casinos. So here let��s briefly explore all of the most popular forms of such tournaments.

Multi-Player Slot Tournaments

These are the most popular tournaments, and it simply means that there are many players playing, all competing against each other. Most slot tournaments will be of this type.

Single-Player Slot Tournaments

This is a specialized type of slot tournament where there is only one player playing, and competing against a specified goal or objective.

For example, a single-player slot tournament machine may be available in the casino, and for the amount of the entry fee (whatever that may be) you can sit at that game and play only by yourself, and after the designated period of play the machine will then tell you if you won any of the qualifying prizes.

Buy-In Slot Tournaments

This is the type of tournament where you pay a cash fee to enter, and then play throughout the rounds of the tournament, and if you reach the qualifying advancement in each such successive round, you will progress to the finals, and there you may reach the top tier of the winners, and collect your prize.

Free-Roll Slot Tournaments

This is a tournament where the entry is free, and therefore you don��t need to buy-in for cash, or some other buy-in requirement. These free-roll slot tournaments are usually offered by the casino as a reward to their regular and premium players, but they can also be used to attract new players to that casino, or online casino.

Sit-n-Go Slot Tournaments

Sit-n-Go (SnG) are usually short tournaments with a number of specifically-designated player spots, usually around 10-to-12 players at a time. This tournament is usually a cash buy-in type of tournament, and it begins automatically when all the designated player spots have been bought.

A SnG tournament ends when the designated amount of play time has been completed, which is usually about 10 minutes of really fast play. When the time expires, the machines will shut down automatically, and the tournament staff will verify who has the highest scores, and those players are then awarded the top prizes.

One-Shot Slot Tournaments

In the majority of slot tournaments, there are usually several rounds before a winner is decided. In one-shot slot tournaments you only get one chance at placing in the winning tier.

Feeder Slot Tournaments

A Feeder Slot Tournament has the same structure as all the other similar tournaments, except here the idea is to score enough points to advance into a bigger tournament, with much larger prizes.

For example, let��s say that a Feeder Slot Tournament is offered with only a $25 Buy-In. But this tournament does not offer a cash prize. Instead, the Top Prize is an Entry into a $1,000 Slot Tournament, where the Prize Pool is much bigger, and therefore offers a chance to walk away with a lot more money.

Scheduled Slot Tournaments

These are the most popular slot tournaments, because the casino, or online casino, can schedule them in advance, usually several weeks, or perhaps by even a few months. This often results in larger turnouts with more players, and, therefore, more money for the prize pool and the prizes.

These tournaments are also popular with casual players, because they can then schedule their casino trip, or vacation, in advance, to coincide with these scheduled tournaments. These slot tournaments are especially popular in casino destinations like Las Vegas, where the major casinos can attract and invite a great many players from all over the country.

Survival Slot Tournaments

These are among the type of slot tournament where players compete in rounds, each round usually about 10 minutes, with the top players from each round advancing into the next round, and so on. How many players advance into the next round depends on the specific rules for that tournament, and for that casino, either real-world or online.

These rules can be substantially different, so it is in your interest to check just exactly what is required to advance into the next round, and how many players will so advance. In most such Slot Tournaments, the top three player will advance, but this can be the top 5 players, or even more, depending on how many players compete in each round.

slot machines for what is a slot tournament article.

Image credit: eskystudio/Shutterstock

What is the Best Strategy to Win Slot Tournaments?

All Slot Machines are random, and all winning spins are based solely on luck.

However, slot tournaments are not without skill and speed and dexterity are among the most important skills!

This means that you must hit the play button as fast as possible, and in a rhythmic pattern to coincide with the activation of the reels, and re-activation of the next spin at the most optimum point.

When the slot machine hits a win, it will temporarily disable the play button, while the winning amount runs up on the credit meter. During this time pressing the button makes no difference, because the player cannot re-activate the next spin while the machine is busy running up the credits from the current win.

Keeping the rhythm of the game and not distracted by the spinning wheels or symbols on the display screen any of the bells and whistles that will happen as you play is the most critical skill to learn when it comes to slot tournaments.

There are however a few other skills that can help get you in the winner��s circle:

Skills Needed to Win Slot Tournaments

  • Always play all the available pay lines
  • Always play maximum credits �C whatever this may be
  • Learn to play fast �C you can practice on regular slots in the casino
  • Lear to push the play button rhythmically and as fast as you can press it
  • Keep your mind clear and do not be distracted
  • Focus on speed �C this is most important, next to playing fast on the play button
  • Learn what will get you into the next round �C is it the most points, or how fast you can play through the tournament credits

Title image credit: eskystudio/Shutterstock

]]>
Can You Bet On The Olympics? Your Betting Guide For the 2024 Olympics https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/can-you-bet-on-the-olympics/ Tue, 30 Jul 2024 11:38:24 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=41338 The answer to ‘can you bet on the Olympics?’ depends on the country you are in. Most countries have legalized betting on the Olympics, with sports betting having been legalized in the US in 2018.

Olympics Games Betting: The Essential Betting Guide

  • Whether betting on the Olympics is legal in depends on which country you are in. However, most counties have legalized sport betting which includes the Olympics.
  • There are actually four Olympic games. The summer Olympics, the Winter Olympics, the Paralympics and the Special Olympics.
  • The Paralympics and the Special Olympics are often confused with each other. The difference is that the Paralympics is primarily for athletes with physical disabilities, while the Special Olympics is for athletes with intellectual disabilities.
  • This guide will cover the basics of Olympics betting and answer questions such as ‘can you bet on the special Olympics?’

Often considered the pinnacle of many athletic events, the Olympics sees athletes from more than 180 countries come together to compete across a variety of sporting events.

As the Olympics are only held every four years and switch host nations every time, each competition has its own personality. This provides exciting opportunities for viewers to enjoy lesser-seen sports and fan favorites.

You can make things even more exciting by Olympic sports betting. Olympic games betting is legal in many countries globally, although there are some critical restrictions you need to consider before you start betting.

Read our complete guide to learn more about how you can bet on the Olympics 2024, including whether wagering on events is legal and some tips for placing successful wagers.

History of Betting on the Olympics

The Olympics are one of the oldest sports events in history, dating back to Ancient Greece around 776 BC. There is evidence that even during the Ancient Olympic Games, betting on athletes to win events was common.

While the Ancient Olympic Games finished around 393 AD, the modern Olympic Games returned in 1896. Most countries globally didn��t accept sports betting legally until later in the 20th century, with the UK legalizing sports betting, including Olympics betting with the Betting and Gaming Act 1960.

Legalizing Sports Betting on the Olympics

Meanwhile, places like the US have regulated sports betting since 1949. However, legal sports betting was limited to Nevada for most of this history. Anyone who visited the Silver State could bet on the Olympic games.

The US Supreme Court struck down the Professional and Amateur Sports Protection Act of 1992 (PASPA) in 2018, allowing other US states to legalize sports betting within their borders. Dozens of US states now allow sports betting, and you can bet on the Olympics 2024 at online sportsbooks or through retail sportsbooks.

Some countries worldwide do not allow betting on the Olympics or any other sports for cultural and religious reasons. For example, sports betting is prohibited in Saudi Arabia under Sharia law.

Olympic Sports Betting: Choosing a Winner

Standard Olympic sports betting involves athletes or teams competing against each other in competitions or events that are usually won through scoring points of some kind (goals, touchdowns, etc.). Most sportsbooks allow you to predict the final event and key events that will happen during the event, such as how many home runs a player will hit in a baseball game.

In Olympic events, many events are determined by the judges�� scores, like boxing matches that don��t feature a knockout. Another example is synchronized diving, which involves several rounds of scoring to determine which nations get a medal.

Of course, backing the nations that have consistently won the most gold medals is always a good idea.

Most sportsbooks won��t offer markets on individual moments during events for the Olympics but will allow you to wager on medal winners. The main exceptions to these rules are soccer and basketball, which will feature many of the same markets you��d expect when placing different types of sports bet.

image for how to bet on the Olympics

Image credit: Heathers/Shutterstock

Can You Bet Money on The Olympics?

You can bet on the Olympics in many countries globally, with sportsbooks operating in Canada, the UK, and the rest of Europe allowing a wide range of wagers on these events.

You must use a sportsbook licensed in your jurisdiction to browse and wager on Olympic betting markets. For example, if you play in the UK, you must use a site licensed by the UK Gambling Commission.

Legality of Olympics Betting in the US

You can also bet on the Olympics in the US, although the availability of this betting will vary from state to state. For example, some US states will completely prohibit Olympic betting. Meanwhile, some states will allow betting on events like soccer and basketball but restrict wagers on judged events like gymnastics, surfing, equestrian, and BMX.

Many Olympic sports are amateur sports, which may raise ethical issues with some players. However, if your licensed sportsbook offers markets on an Olympic sport, it is doing so safely and legally.

Some Olympic events like skateboarding and gymnastics feature young athletes under 18. For example, an 11-year-old competed at the 2024 Olympics in skateboarding. Most sportsbooks will prohibit wagering on events featuring younger athletes to protect them from the pressure created by sports betting.

Betting on Different Types of Olympics

Of course, there are two Olympic competitions for fans to enjoy: the Summer Olympics and the Winter Olympics. While these events both showcase the top athletes, they host different sports and betting opportunities. Below, we��ll cover a few of the differences between betting on the Summer Olympics and the Winter Olympics.

Can You Bet on The Summer Olympics?

Summer Olympics sports betting is so appealing to bettors because there is a broad mix of sports to enjoy, including fan favorites like basketball and soccer, alongside niche sports like martial arts, equestrian events, and gymnastics.

As athletes compete at the highest level, the fields for these events are often relatively even, meaning some generous odds are available.

As the Summer Olympics are often held in the gap between the seasons of many major sports, the competition gets plenty of competition from sportsbooks. You��ll find special offers like chances to earn bonus bets, odds boosts, and other promotions available before and during the tournament. 

Can you bet on the Winter Olympics

The first Winter Olympics was hosted in Chamonix, France, in 1924. The competition was held in the winter months of January and February in the same year as the Summer Olympics until 1994 when it moved to two years after every Olympics.

For example, the 1994 Winter Olympics was held between the 1992 Barcelona Olympics and the 1996 Atlanta Olympics.

While the Summer Olympics has a mixture of sports players might recognize from outside of Olympics betting, most Winter Olympics sports are niche. Therefore, there are many exciting new events for sportsbook customers to wager on, including curling, biathlon, and snowboarding.

Can you bet on the Special Olympics?

Betting on the Special Olympics made its first appearance in 2003, when BetOnline announced it would be offering a sportsbook for the event. So the answer to ‘can you bet on the special Olympics?’ is now a resounding yes!

Can you bet on the Paralympics?

As with the standard Olympics, whether you can bet on the Paralympics will depend on the legality of sportsbook betting where you live. But if its legal to bet only Olympics in your area, then it’s also legal to bet on the Paralympics.

image for how to bet on the Olympics

Image credit: Kovrop/Shutterstock

Betting Strategies for the Olympics

Like all sports betting, wagering on the Olympics is can come down to luck as much as skill. However, there are some Olympics betting strategies you can consider to increase your chances of winning.

One key factor is research. There are dozens of sports at the Olympics, many of which you can usually bet on, like basketball, cycling, tennis, and soccer, so many fans may be excited to back markets on niche sports.

However, betting on a sport you know nothing about may result in losing wagers. So, hold off on those canoeing slalom bets! That being said, niche sports are a best places to find PK bets.

The Home Field Advantage

While it may seem simple, backing the hosts is a strong strategy for Olympic betting. Past games have shown that hosts often perform better on home soil than nations would usually rank.

For example, Australia came fourth in the 2000 Olympic games in Sydney, a finish it has only matched once since. Meanwhile, South Korea hosted in 1988 and finished fourth, a position it has failed to match since.

The best example was Spain, which hosted the games in 1992 and finished the tournament in sixth. The nation has not ranked in the top ten in any games since then.

Betting on Different Olympic Sports

One of the things people most enjoy about Olympics sports betting is the wide range of sports taking the spotlight over a few weeks.

Whether you��re interested in soccer or taekwondo, there is something for everybody. Some popular sports for Olympic games betting include soccer, gymnastics, athletics, and basketball.

As the hosts, Paris was also allowed to add new sports, such as  surfing, sport climbing, skateboarding, and break dancing. Unfortunately, it seems America’s most hated sport, Ultimate Frisbee, seems to have been dropped (ironically) from the 2028 games in Los Angeles.

Team vs Individual Bets

With so many different events, bettors need to consider various factors. For example, if you��re betting on a sport like basketball or soccer, you��re betting on a team��s performance rather than a single athlete. Many betting sites will also let you wager on players to hit individual stats in games with these events, such as a soccer player scoring a goal.

Even with sports that feature individual athletes, like gymnastics or fencing, you can still wager on the whole performance of a nation. For example, you can bet on a particular athlete to score the highest total in the men��s pommel horse, but a nation to score the most points total.

Additionally, if you��re betting on a sport that might feature young athletes, such as skateboarding or gymnastics, you may not find betting lines available for these events to protect these athletes.

Will You be Able to Bet on The Olympics in 2024?

The Olympics brings together around 200 countries together to compete in a wide range of athletic events. For many sports, the Olympics is the highest level of competition.

You place wagers on the Olympics in multiple countries worldwide, although the events and bet types that may be available will vary. It��s tempting to try betting on all the sports you don��t see very often at sportsbooks, but we recommend doing your research to place the most intelligent bets you can. 

While betting on the Olympic Games is exciting, it��s important to always gamble responsibly. Many sportsbooks offer account tools like deposit, time, and spending limits to help control your gambling habits. If you need support, you��ll find on-site resources on how to play responsibly and links to third-party problem gambling support.

The Olympic Games hold a special place in many sports fans�� hearts, capable of creating exciting and heartfelt moments with memories lasting a lifetime. The medley of sports covered across the competition allows all sports fans to enjoy something. That enjoyment can be boosted even more by placing sports bets on the world��s biggest sports event.

Title Image credit: Delpixle/Shutterstock

]]>
Durak Decoded: Unlocking the Secrets of Russia’s Favorite Card Game https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/discover-durak-rules/ Fri, 26 Jul 2024 12:33:21 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=10866 Durak is a popular card game in Russia and has enjoyed a golden period ever since the dissolution of the old Soviet Union because its simple rules make it a great pick up game

The Essentials

  • Hugely popular in Russia, Durak is a card shedding game similar to Shithead, Crazy Eights, Old Maid and Big 2. The player who discards all their cards first wins.
  • The Durak rules are simple to pick up and the game falls into the ‘easy to learn, hard to master’ category.
  • Best played with between two and five players, the Durak card game only requires a standard card deck, making it an excellent travelling game.
  • Because of its popularity, Durak is often gambled on in Russia, with the winning player (the first to discard all their cards) winning the pot.

Considering how many people play the game it’s not too well known outside of its native country. Here��s a look at how the Durak Rules, a step by step breakdown of a game turn, where you can play online, and how to gamble on a game of Durak.

image for article on Durak rules

Image credit: Vector Point Studio/Shutterstock

Crafting Strategy: How The Durak Rules Work

The concept of the game is very basic. Players must aim to be the quickest to get rid of all their cards. The last person with cards left is the ‘durak’ or fool.

A deck of 36 cards is used and the game is ideally played between two and five players. The deck is shuffled and each player receives six cards. The bottom card of the remaining deck in the middle of the table is displayed face up. This will indicate the trump suit.

The remaining cards in the deck are then placed on top of that face up card at a 90 degree angle so the face up card remains visible. This pile of cards will act as the draw pile called the ��prikup��.

Cards discarded during the process of the game are placed on a discard pile away from the prikup and become inactive.

Playing by the Rules: A Step-By-Step Guide to Durak Gameplay

Now that you understand the basics of how Durak works, let’s take a look at a step-by-step guide to a Durak card game round:

  1. The set-up of durak means players must be forced to attack and defend. The player with the lowest trump card is the first designated attacker. The individual to their left is then the defender.
  2. The play rotates clockwise so that is always the case for the remainder of the game.
  3. Play begins with the attacker playing their first card face up. The defender then has the chance to either defend or pass the attack.
  4. If they successfully defend then they will not have to take on the attacker’s card. If they pass on the attack then they will take the attacker’s card, add it to their own card, and become the attacker themselves.
  5. Passing an attack cannot be done if the player does not possess a card of the same rank as the attacker.
  6. It is also possible for the defender to defeat the attacker.
  7. They can choose higher value cards from their pack to win the hand. Other players can add attacking cards at any point during the turn. If the defender decides they cannot survive the attack then at any point they can cut their losses and pick up the cards in play on the table before the situation worsens.
  8. If the player successfully defends against all attacking cards, then the cards are taken out of the game and placed on the discard pile.
  9. At the end of every hand, players must then draw cards from the remaining prikup until they are in possession of six cards each.
  10. This continues until the prikup is used up. Players may leave the game as soon as they have gotten rid of all their cards in their hand.
image for article on Durak card game

Image credit: Vector Point Studio/Shutterstock

Rule Mastery: Elevating Your Game with Expert Strategies

As a game of attack versus defense, Durak naturally has various card game strategies in play. The strategies used in durak can prove to be very in-depth. We’ll attempt to summarize them slightly, to avoid writing a durak version of War and Peace.

  • The main strategy should be based around entering the latter stages of the game with as strong a hand of six cards as possible.
  • Players do not want to head into that latter stage with the odds stacked against them. A key approach here is to act aggressively early on and try to collect the strongest six card hand they can muster. This will then give them impetus heading into the latter stages.
  • When it comes to defending and attacking, players really need to play the scenario. The best approach to have for defending is to always assume the worst case scenario. If a situation arises that players are confident they can defend 90% of the time, then do so. Otherwise, surrender ASAP to avoid things spiraling out of control.
  • For attacking, it should be used as a tactic to get rid of bad cards early and save the stronger cards for later. Do not be tempted to bring in the big guns early in order to try and damage the prospects of a fellow player.
  • During the end phases of the game it is all about being decisive. Try to control as many Aces as possible. These are not only strong in defense but they are even more powerful in attack because they cannot be beaten.
  • Players should do everything they can to get rid of non-trump cards to focus on the more influential trump cards.

Can You Play Online?

Durak is available to play online for free versus a computer opponent and other human players.

Sites such as playok.com and durak.hlop.de offer durak play online for fun or points. It is also available to play on mobile platforms with apps based on the game listed in the Google Play Store and Apple Store.

Can You Gamble on Durak?

Because Durak has a defined winner in each round (the player who discards all their cards first) its an easy game to gamble on. Generally, each player puts a set amount into a communal pot, which the winner scoops.

Despite being a Russian game, gambling on Durak in Russia is a little more complicated. Gambling is only legal in Russia in four regions, after the government made all gambling illegal in 2009.

These four regions are Altai, Kaliningrad, Krasnodar, and Primorsky. Durak can be gambled on provided it takes place within the boundaries of these four regions. Likewise, Russians in those areas can access online casinos, which can banned in the rest of the country.

Of course, if you’re outside of Russia, you can gamble on Durak as much as you like (within the laws of your home country). While you won’t find Durak on as many casino sites as say, online poker or online blackjack, the game is slowly become more popular outside of Russia.

Title Image credit: E.O/Shutterstock

]]>
Is Online Blackjack Rigged? No! Here Are The Reasons Why https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/is-online-blackjack-rigged/ Tue, 23 Jul 2024 10:00:00 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=41061 The simple answer to “Is online blackjack rigged” is no.

Are Online Blackjack Games Rigged? What You Need to Know

  • No, online blackjack games are not rigged. If you are using a licensed online blackjack casino, then the games are heavily regulated and overseen by accredited auditing bodies.
  • Most online blackjack card games use RNG (random number generators) to decided which cards are dealt. This also ensures that players can’t count cards.
  • Licensed online casinos are regularly audited to ensure their system give the player a reasonable chance to win
  • This guide will show how online blackjack isn’t rigged, explain why systems are used to ensure this, and give you some tip on which sites to avoid so you stay safe.
  • Large online Casinos like Stake, High Five Casino,?and?Hello Millions have much more to lose by being caught cheating than they could win by rigging blackjack games.

Is Online Blackjack Rigged: Debunking Common Misconceptions

The vast majority of online blackjack games are legitimate, give you a fair chance of winning, and a heavily regulated. To give you complete peace of mind, we��ve busted some common misconceptions, broken down how online blackjack games are regulated and listed steps you can take to keep yourself safe while enjoying online blackjack.

The first and most common myth can debunk is the idea that all online blackjack games are some kind of scam. Unless you are a blackjack player at an unlicensed or rigged US casino, online blackjack is not fixed against the player.

How Are Online Casinos Kept Honest?

Our recommended regulated online casino games use RNGs (Random Number Generators) and are externally audited by independent testing agencies to guarantee that outcomes are completely fair and random.

So, why do you lose when playing blackjack online? Well, this is because blackjack is a game of chance. There is nothing you can do to influence the outcome or shift the odds and the cards in your favor, regardless of whether you’re playing in a casino or playing mobile blackjack on your phone.

You can use online blackjack strategies and betting systems to help your bankroll last longer, but there is no surefire way of predicting what cards will show up next.

4 More Blackjack Myths Busted

There are plenty of other harmfully myths about online blackjack, so let��s bust four more of them!

  1. Online Casinos are all Scams: While the odds are against you, reputable real money casinos are not swindling you. Each game you play has been tested to ensure it provides random and fair outcomes.
  2. Some Blackjack Games are Hot/Cold: Because every outcome of online blackjack is random, there is no guarantee what the next result will be. If a table has not paid for several rounds, it��s simply down to random chance and not the casino rigging the game not to pay.
  3. Casinos Freeze Games During Win Streaks: Blackjack is a hard game to win, but it is possible to go on streaks and build up profits in a single session. It is a myth that when this happens, the online casino or casino app will freeze the game to stop you from winning more.
  4. Live Dealer Games are More Secure: Live dealer games are no more secure or immune to rigging than online blackjack, but people perceive them as being harder to rig. Perhaps being able to see the action with a human dealer puts people at ease. The reality is virtual RNG blackjack is as completely random and secure as playing with a live dealer.

Is Online Blackjack Rigged: What Is The House Edge?

All reputable online and land-based local casinos give you a fair chance to win, but the system is set up so that the casino wins the majority of the time. You have probably heard the term ��the house always wins,�� and the house edge is what this refers to.

House edge is set up to favor casinos in each game. So, if blackjack has a house edge of 0.5%, that means for every $10 you bet, you could win back $9.50 and lose $0.50 on average. Those 50 cents are the profit the casino makes. The house edge isn��t a set in stone amount, but rather an average taken over millions of hands of blackjack.

You could bet $10, land a winning hand, and double your money to $20. If you walk away at that moment, the casino will be down $10. Equally, you could bet your $10 and lose all of it, meaning the casino/house makes $10 in clear profit from one single player.

Because most people do not walk away in profit, the ��house always wins�� eventually. If you do suffer a losing streak, I can be easy to thing online blackjack is rigged, but the answer is always just probability.

Is Online Blackjack Rigged: How Are Games Kept Fair?

We have talked a lot about how safe and fair online blackjack games are. Now lets take a look at what measures are in place to ensure that casinos and their games are held accountable and deliver fair gameplay!

RNGs

A Random Number Generator is software that randomizes the outcome of every game. Importantly, RNG online blackjack games use this technology, where the RNG generates numbers randomly to ensure they cannot be predicted.

This makes them more secure than standard land-based blackjack games, where it is possible to count cards, especially in single deck blackjack.

With an RNG, the gambler, casino, or software provider cannot influence the outcome, which is why they are widely used in games like online roulette and online poker as well as blackjack.

Auditing Bodies

Using an RNG on its own is not enough because the casino/software provider could theoretically rig the software to deliver non-random results. Of course, this is not the case at our recommended online casinos, but to ensure this does not happen and to enhance their reputability, leading software studios allow their games to be tested by independent labs.

Third-party auditors such as eCOGRA, iTech Labs, and GLI test games to ensure the RNG is random and fair.

Casino Licenses

To operate legally in the US, online casinos must obtain a gambling license in every state in which they operate. These gambling authorities, such as the New Jersey Division of Gaming Enforcement or the Pennsylvania Gaming Control Board, hold online gambling sites to strict player safety and fair gaming standards.

You should always avoid any casino that does not have a license, as this is likely a rogue site that may have unfair games or not pay winnings.

 Image for is online blackjack rigged.

Image credit: RomanR/Shutterstock

How to Protect Yourself When Playing Online Blackjack

While most casino games, and 100% of the games we recommend, are totally safe, it��s always a good idea to take a few extra steps to keep yourself safe online. Here are some easy-to-implement safety tips you can use:

  • Use Our Recommended Casinos: The first thing that can help you stay safe when playing blackjack online is to choose one of the leading blackjack online casinos we recommend. Our gambling experts know exactly what to look for and have found the safest, fairest, and most reputable casino brands regulated in the US.
  • Never Compromise on a License: If the online casino you are looking at does not have a license with a US state regulatory authority, leave the casino at once and absolutely do not register or deposit money.
  • Read Customer Feedback: Fellow casino players are a reliable source of information. Check on sites like Trustpilot, the Google Play Store, or the Apple App Store to see how other players rate an online casino.
  • Check Their Software Providers and Audits: The casinos we recommend have blackjack games from reputable providers like NetEnt, Playtech, and Evolution. These studios are open about their RNG testing and game fairness. You can also check to see if your casino has been tested by an auditor such as eCOGRA, iTech Labs, TST, or GLI.
  • Use Secure Payments: If you use e-wallets or prepaid cards, you can avoid giving the casino your financial information, making deposits and withdrawals more secure.
  • Play For Free: You can play free online blackjack on most online casinos. This allows you to test the game or practice before you bet your own money.
  • Always Game Responsibly: Think about how much money you can afford to lose before you start betting. Do not use money that comes from your living expenses. Remember, while the games are not rigged, the house always wins. Chasing losses can lead to your bankroll running out quickly.

Online Blackjack Rigged: FAQ

It’s perfectly reasonable for a player to wonder is ‘online blackjack fixed’ if they’re on a losing streak, so to put your mind at rest, here are some of the most common questions about online blackjack being rigged, answered!

  • Can online blackjack be beaten? Yes, absolutely. While the casino always has a house edge, RNG ensures that players always have a reasonable chance of winning.
  • Is online blackjack predetermined? No. Whenever a card is dealt, the software used in online blackjack uses a balanced RNG system to determine a random card. It is not predetermined and is, in fact, more random than live blackjack.
  • What are the odds of winning blackjack online? Blackjack odds are based on the hand you are dealt. However, there are some blackjack strategies and card counting methods you can use to
  • Is virtual blackjack fixed? No. If you’re playing at a licensed, regulated online casino then RNGs and auditing by independent agencies ensure none of the casino games are fixed.

Shuffle Away Your Doubts on Online Blackjack

The myth that all online blackjack games are scams or rigged is just that, a myth. Modern online casino games are heavily regulated and audited to give you a reasonable chance of winning. You can get out there an enjoy online blackjack to your hearts content, without constantly thinking “is online blackjack rigged?”

If you looking for some expert advice on how to up your blackjack game with easy to understand tips, check out these articles:

Lead image credit: Nazarovsergey/Shutterstock

]]>
What Is Pai Gow Poker? Your Ultimate Playbook https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/what-is-pai-gow/ Tue, 16 Jul 2024 12:23:39 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=41091 If you��re looking to learn how to play Pai Gow poker, you��re in luck �� it��s much simpler than forms of poker like Texas Hold��em and Omaha.

Here are the quick essentials:

  • Pai Gow poker used the traditional poker hand ranking system.
  • Pai Gow poker is played with a 53-card deck rather than 52-card �� it includes one joker!
  • Players compete against the dealer or ��banker�� rather than each other.

As you can see, Pai Gow is a fun game to play against ��the House�� �� you aren��t trying to take money away from other players! The rush comes from winning money against the casino.

Here are the poker hand rankings in case you need an easy reference cheat sheet:

Pai Gow Poker Hand Rankings

1. Royal Flush: A, K, Q, J, 10, all of the same suit.

2. Straight Flush: Five consecutive cards of the same suit.

3. Four of a Kind: Four cards of the same rank.

4. Full House: Three of a kind combined with a pair.

5. Flush: Five cards of the same suit, not in sequence.

6. Straight: Five consecutive cards of different suits.

7. Three of a Kind: Three cards of the same rank.

8. Two Pair: Two pairs of cards of the same rank.

9. One Pair: Two cards of the same rank.

10. High Card: The highest card if no other hand is made.

what is pai gow - card hand rankings

How Is The Joker Used In Pai Gow?

��But what about the joker?�� you may ask. How does he come into play with the Pai Gow hand rankings?

In Pai Gow Poker, the joker can be used in a few different ways:

  • Ace: When used alone, the joker can be an ace.
  • Wild: In straights, flushes, and straight flushes, the joker can be wild and used as any card in the deck. For example, when used to complete a flush, the joker represents the highest value card that’s not already in the hand.
  • Complete a straight or flush: The joker can be used to complete a straight or flush in the backhand, or five-card hand.

What this means is that the joker serves as a special conditional wildcard. You can��t use him to play just any card, but rather a completion card. Or, again, alone simply as an ace. His appearance naturally makes it easier to achieve a high hand ranking, and, if utilized correctly, can significantly increase your Pai Gow poker payouts.

NOTE: Certain card rooms and casinos have their own deviations of these Pai Gow poker rules. They can definitely vary, so make sure to check with wherever you plan on playing.

Pai Gow Poker Rules

Let’s explore how to play Pai Gow poker in detail. In this game, up to six players face off against the dealer or banker, whom we’ll consistently refer to as the dealer.

Each player �� including the dealer �� receives seven cards. These seven cards are used to form two separate hands, hence why Pai Gow poker is also alternatively known as ��Double Hand Poker��. One hand is designated as the ��high hand�� and the other as the ��low hand��.

The high hand must be stronger than the low hand.

For instance, if your low hand is a pair of Kings, your high hand must be at least a pair of Aces or higher, such as two pairs or better holdings.

  • The high hand must be made-up of five cards.
  • The low hand must be made-up of two cards.

Because of this, the low hand will always be a pair or two high-ranking cards.

If the rare situation arises where the high hand is not stronger than the low hand, the player is considered to have ��miss-set�� their hand. This results in a foul and an automatic loss! Make sure to be careful when you��re new to the game and refer to the above Pai Gow poker hand rankings as needed.

Most casinos will allow you to bring your own print-out or electronic guide for easy reference, as this doesn��t give you an edge over the casino and you��re not competing against other players. Be gentle with yourself as you master the Pai Gow poker rules and do not play in settings that make you uncomfortable. This includes table limits.

Next in understanding the Pai Gow poker rules comes betting �� each table has their own minimums and maximums. These min/max limits will determine the size of the game, meaning how much you can win or lose at a time. As stated, stick to table stakes you can afford.

If both your 5-card hand and your 2-card hand beat the dealer’s hands, you win the round and collect double the bet you placed. If both of your hands lose to the dealer’s hands, you lose your bet, and the dealer adds it to their bank. If you win one hand and the dealer wins the other, the round ends in a “push,” where there is no winner, your bet is returned, and the game moves on to the next round. Pushes are very common.

Naturally the goal is to be the net winner.

As a recap, these are the three outcomes:

  • Win = collect double your bet.
  • Lose = dealer takes your bet.
  • Push = your bet is returned, but the House still takes a commission.

Step-by-Step Gameplay

Here’s how Pai Gow poker gameplay begins:

  1. Before the cards are dealt, each player places their bet.
  2. Seven cards are dealt face down to each player.
  3. Players rearrange their cards into a high hand and a low hand.
  4. The dealer reveals their seven cards face up and arranges them into a high hand and a low hand.
  5. To win a round, both your high hand and low hand must be better than the dealer’s high hand and low hand.

On a casino Pai Gow table, you will typically see the letters “H” and “L” indicating where to place your high and low hands. This makes it easy to see who wins.

A time where the winner may seem less clear is when the player and dealer have identical hands. The result is that the dealer wins! They will claim the bet, tragically.

Poker table with hand of cards for 'what is pai gow'

Lead image credit: Kitreel/Shutterstock

Pai Gow Poker Odds

Be aware that this is a typical gambling casino game �� the Pai Gow poker odds are not in your favor. The House edge may seem small but it��s not insignificant. It is impossible to tip the Pai Gow poker odds in your favor.

  • For every push, the casino usually takes a 5% ��commission�� or rake.
  • If a player holds the same hand as the dealer, the dealer wins.
  • Pai Gow has a lower House edge than double-zero roulette, but higher than baccarat.

The house edge in Pai Gow poker is estimated to be between 2% and 3%. For comparison, the house edge on a double-zero roulette wheel is over 5%, while a single-zero roulette wheel has a house edge of about 2.7% �� similar to Pai Gow poker payouts.

The standard baccarat house edge is close to a low 1% making it theoretically nearer to breakeven, but you��d be surprised how much money people can lose even at a 1% disadvantage because it compounds over time.

You can improve your odds slightly by playing as the banker because you win in the case of a tie. Casinos typically offer players the opportunity to act as the banker, which is a better mathematical proposition, even though you absorb greater financial risk. Still, the overall odds remain unfavorable due to the game’s inherent house edge.

Pai Gow Poker Strategy

While the overall odds of winning in the long run may be a deterrent, there are still strategic ways to play more effectively in the short term.

Hand Setting Strategy:

  • High Hand Priority: Always prioritize setting a strong high hand. This is crucial because the high hand must beat the dealer��s high hand to win the bet.
  • Low Hand Strategy: The low hand should be strong enough to ensure a better chance of winning one hand if splitting with the dealer. Aim for a pair of high-ranking cards or a low pair.

Splitting Pairs:

  • Optimal Pair Splitting: When dealt pairs, strategize to split them between the high and low hands effectively. For instance, with a pair of Aces, place one Ace in the low hand and the other in the high hand to maximize both hands�� strength.

Managing Joker Strategy:

  • Utilizing the Joker: If dealt a Joker, consider it as an Ace unless it can complete a straight or flush in the high hand. In the low hand, the Joker can be beneficial in completing a flush or straight, but ensure it��s used wisely to avoid weakening the high hand.

Banking Strategies:

  • Advantages of Banking: Opt to be the banker whenever possible. While it requires a larger bankroll, being the banker gives you a slight statistical advantage due to winning ties. But you must manage your bankroll effectively to withstand potential losses when playing as the banker.

Understanding House Edge:

  • House Edge Awareness: Recognize that Pai Gow Poker typically carries a house edge of around 2% to 3%, which is lower than many other casino games like double-zero roulette or slots. However, this edge can impact long-term profitability, so play with a strategic mindset to mitigate losses. This means recognizing when it��s time to walk away �� if you��ve won, you��ve already defied the odds. Take the money and run!

Before wagering real money, you can learn how to play Pai Gow poker by practicing online or in free-play modes offered by some casinos. This allows you to familiarize yourself with hand setting, strategies, and the flow of the game without financial risk.

Pai Gow Perfection: Wrapping Up Your Play Guide

Pai Gow poker demands a blend of skill and good grasp of probabilities. By mastering Pai Gow poker strategy and understanding the game��s nuances, you can significantly improve your chances of success. Remember, while luck plays a role, a well-thought-out strategy can tilt the odds closer to your favor�� although the House still always wins!

If you’d like to grow your Pai Gow poker skills, or just your poker skills in general, check out the articles below. Packed with tips and tricks from poker experts, they’ll have you on the high-rollers table in no time!

Lead image credit: Victor Moussa/Shutterstock

]]>
The Casino Moguls Cashing In on Trump��s Campaign https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/casino-moguls-trump-campaign/ Thu, 11 Jul 2024 11:46:07 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=41114 We��ve all heard the phrase, ��It takes a village to raise a child.�� But with the upcoming election looming large and still no clear winner in sight (even less so after the woeful first Presidential debate), it begs the question: how much cash does it take to win a Presidency?

It��s no secret that before he was the 45th President of the United States, Donald J. Trump was heavily involved in the US casino scene. Snapping up multiple properties throughout the 1980s, Trump had his name in lights no less than three times on the Atlantic City boardwalk.

Though he managed to bankrupt each of his New Jersey properties, his legacy lives on as one of America��s gambling linchpins. As such, it��s hardly surprising that many of the casino kings he once rubbed shoulders with are opening up their wallets and funding his campaign.

Desperate to close the gap between Biden��s campaign cash flow and his own, Trump has been ingratiating himself with the Vegas elite. From the original legends of the Strip to their families, partners, and stakeholders, here are the casino moguls cashing in on Trump��s third Presidential bid.

Steve Wynn

Donald Trump and Steve Wynn engaged in a tumultuous legal battle over Atlantic City��s gambling landscape that lasted throughout the 1990s. But after years of lawsuits, employee poaching, and public slander, their relationship eventually transformed from rivalry to respect.

Mirroring the age-old ��enemies-to-lovers�� trope, Donald Trump and Steve Wynn somehow transformed their mutual hatred into a politically charged friendship. After all, the pair share many similarities: both are casino moguls, share the republican ideology, have faced numerous sexual assault allegations – the list goes on.

The outcome of Steve Wynn��s allegations? A $10 million fine, loss of ownership of his casino empire, and exclusion from participating in any casino-related role other than a customer.

Back In The Game

However, it seems Wynn isn��t sitting around licking his wounds. Instead, the former finance chair of the Republican National Committee has rekindled his political associations.

In April 2024, Wynn pledged over $800,000 to a Trump 47 campaign fundraiser, which he helped organize and co-hosted. He also received a shoutout from Trump after an uncontested victory in New Hampshire in January. In June 2024, Wynn was finally victorious in his years-long foreign lobbying case against the Department of Justice.

While his historical feud with Trump played out on the New Jersey shore, Steve Wynn was one of the most influential figures on the Vegas Strip. During his 50-year career, Wynn became the majority shareholder of the Golden Nugget Casino (the youngest casino owner in Vegas), opened a string of legendary properties (including the Mirage, the Bellagio, and Treasure Island), launched his eponymous Wynn Resorts Hotel & Casino chain, started the online gambling site, Wynnbet and expanded into Macau.

Wynn hotel and casino

Image credit – Wangkun Jia/Shutterstock

Dr. Miriam Adelson

Wynn isn��t the only mogul backing the Trump administration. Dr. Miriam Adelson, wife of the casino magnate Sheldon Adelson, has been a staunch supporter of Trump since the beginning. After flying under the political radar for a couple of years, Aldelson has returned to back her favorite wispy-haired Republican.

In 2016, the Adelsons donated over $25 million to Trump��s campaign and inauguration ceremony. Two years later, the pair pledged over $110 million to various Republican causes, earning Miriam the Presidential Medal of Freedom in 2018. The Adelsons also spent around $90 million aiding Trump��s failed 2020 re-election efforts.

Far from Wynn��s disgraced expulsion from the Vegas strip, Miriam Adelson has found herself the proprietor of one of its biggest casinos. After her husband passed away in 2021, Adelson inherited the majority share of his casino empire, Las Vegas Sands, and became the fifth-richest woman in America. Ironically, the newly-appointed kingpin (or should that be queenpin?) of gambling is a doctor who specializes in the biology of addiction.

The Queenpin of Vegas

Since assuming her new role as majority shareholder, Dr. Adelson has set her sights on more than just casinos. In November 2023, Adelson shed $2 billion of company stock (around 10% of her share) to purchase majority ownership of the Dallas Mavericks.

Six months later, she blew the dust off her political checkbook and reprised her role as Trump��s most extravagant supporter. Though she refrained from investing during the early stages of the 2024 election, Dr. Adelson donated over $400,000 to the Trump 47 Joint Fundraising Committee in May.

Almost immediately after the June presidential debate between Trump and Biden��during which Trump aligned himself with her pro-Israel sentiments��Adelson pledged a mind-blowing $100 million to Trump��s campaign via the reconstituted Preserve America super PAC. According to Dave Carney, leader of said super PAC, the money will be spent on media campaigns to win over a handful of undetermined states.

John Paulson

Though not directly a casino owner himself, John Paulson enmeshed himself in the casino world with his various supersized stakes. Through his hedge fund, Paulson & Co., John Paulson bought stakes in companies such as MGM Resorts, where he became the second-largest shareholder of the MGM Mirage after a $410 million stock purchase in 2010.

He��s also held positions with Caesar��s (buying 12.3 million shares in 2012), Boyd Gaming (where he swapped $40 million for 4.6% ownership), and Bally��s (which he added to his portfolio in 2021 with a $54.11 million stake). Though he has since relinquished these stakes, it��s clear he��s always had a keen eye for casino investments.

Potential Cabinet Pick

Paulson has been publicly linked to Donald Trump since 2016 when he was a valued donor and financial adviser to the Trump campaign. Now, it seems he��s back in the political limelight and hoping to offer up more than just his wallet. In March 2024, Trump discussed the possibility of recruiting Paulson as his Treasury secretary if he wins the election.

Paulson is already going to great lengths to prove his devotion to Trump. In April 2024, the hedge fund manager opened up his Palm Beach mansion to host a fundraiser in Trump��s honor, aiming to rectify the financial disparity between Biden��s campaign fund and his own. The event, which had around 100 attendees and cost between $250,000 to $824,600 per ticket, reportedly raised over $50 million for the Trump campaign.  

The Venetian Casino

Image credit – Ken Wolter/Shutterstock

Tilman Fertitta

Tilman Fertitta is the owner and CEO of Landry��s Inc., which operates over 600 casinos, hotels, restaurants, and entertainment venues across the US. Landry��s is a subsidiary of his entertainment conglomerate, Fertitta Entertainment Inc.

Perhaps the most famous of all Landry��s brands is the Golden Nugget Hotel and Casino, which Fertitta acquired from the Poster Financial Group in 2005 and which was cemented as one of the Strip��s most iconic casinos in 1977 by former owner Steve Wynn. Since acquiring the initial two Golden Nugget casinos, Fertitta has opened half a dozen Nugget resorts across the US.

The NBA��s Houston Rockets are another prominent business venture for the Texan tycoon, which he acquired through Fertitta Entertainment Inc. in 2017 and doubled in valuation in the next seven years. However, they��ve caused him considerably more hassle in the last few years than his successful casino resorts.

Houston We Have A Problem

In 2020, star players James Harden and Russell Westbrook requested to be traded from the Rockets, largely due to Fertitta��s strong support of Trump and the Republican party. After Trump��s numerous attacks on the ��low IQs of African-Americans�� and on NBA star LeBron James specifically, it��s not hard to see why.

Despite dissatisfaction among the team about his political views (and possibly because both players have already left the Rockets), Tilman Fertitta is in no rush to diminish his support for the Trump 47 campaign. Instead, he��s pulling out all the stops to ensure ol�� Don gets the funding he needs.

In May 2024, Fertitta hosted a private fundraiser inside his five-star Post Oak Hotel in Uptown Houston. Tickets cost between $100,000 to $844,600 per couple, with a photo op thrown in for a mere $25,000. Fertitta��s co-hosts included oil tycoon George Bishop, Hilcorp Energy CEO Jeff Hildebrand, and Al A. Gonsoulin, chairman and chief executive of the energy aviation company PHI Inc.

Lorenzo and Frank Fertitta

Brothers Frank III and Lorenzo Fertitta are also big-time backers of the Trump campaign and long-standing Republican donors. Third cousins of Tilman Fertitta, Frank III and Lorenzo inherited their father��s successful Station Casinos chain in 1993, which consists of 17 properties throughout Nevada.

However, the brothers made the bulk of their billions through the MMA promotion company UFC, which they bought for $2 million in 2001 and sold for $5 billion in 2017.

The Fertitta brothers have long been embroiled in a legal battle with the Culinary Union, a 60,000-strong organization representing Vegas�� tourism industry workers and the largest union in Nevada. Though Culinary has successfully unionized most Vegas casinos, Station and Red Rock Resorts (Fertitta��s publicly traded arm) are proving a difficult stone to turn.

In September 2021, the brothers were subpoenaed for attempting to undercut labor organizing efforts, and in March 2022, they faced a mass action lawsuit for violating Nevada��s ��Right to Return�� Act.

America First Action

So, how are the Fertitta��s linked to Donald Trump? Since 2016, the pair have donated over $5 million towards Trump��s campaigns, including over $200,000 to his Inaugural Committee and $2 million to the controversial America First Action super PAC. In 2022, the brothers donated over $1.5 million to various Republican PACs.

Though it remains to be seen how much the Fertitta��s will pledge during the 2024 campaign, their involvement is pretty much guaranteed. The brothers met with Trump in January 2024, where they allegedly committed to supporting his latest Presidential endeavors.

MGM Grand

Image credit – Tupungato/Shutterstock

Phil Ruffin

Last on our list but the first out of the gates, Phil Ruffin was the first casino mogul to donate to Trump��s 2024 campaign. Donating $1 million to the MAGA Inc. super PAC and more than $800,000 to the Trump 47 Committee, Ruffin was a real leader of the PAC (pun intended).

Co-owner of the Trump International Hotel and long-term sidekick of Trump himself, Ruffin made his money through casino acquisitions. He bought the New Frontier Hotel & Casino in 1998 for just shy of $200 million and sold it to Israeli developers a decade later for $1.2 billion.

Leader of the PAC

In 2009, he bought the Treasure Island Hotel & Casino for $775 million (one of the many Strip casinos founded by Steve Wynn) and acquired the Circus Circus Casino for $825 million in 2019. Despite the former churning out enough money to fund Ruffin��s retirement for the next few centuries ($400 million annually, if you��re interested), the 89-year-old casino magnate refuses to bow out of the gambling game.

Sure, the pair don��t always see eye to eye – for example, Donald believed you could kill the coronavirus with bleach, while Phil was adamant that sunlight and desert heat would do the trick. However, Ruffin��s latest donations prove he��s just as invested in Trump��s 2024 campaign as he was in the last two.

If you’re interested in learning more about the 45th president, his casino mogul supporters, and their many many ties to the casino world and Vegas, check out these articles:

Title image credit – Iv Olga/Shutterstock

]]>
Meet Tim Naki: The Viral Sensation Making Millions https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/tim-naki/ Mon, 24 Jun 2024 10:51:42 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=40864 Tim Naki – whose real name is Tim Myers – is a Canada-based, New Zealand-born gambling streamer. Nicknamed after the mountainous region from which he hails, the Taranaki native recently surged into the mainstream after his legendary blackjack series went viral.

Here at Casino.org, we��ve been following the Tim Naki saga closely, and have compiled the ultimate account of all of his wins, losses, and pushes over the last few months. Carry on reading for the most in-depth and up-to-date history of Tim Naki��s legendary blackjack betting series.

Who Is Tim Naki?

Tim Naki is part of the Degeneration Nation, which, according to the official Instagram page, is ��a collective of the best gambling streamers on Twitch��. He has been streaming his online slot gameplay for well over a year, but it was his blackjack series that really caught people��s attention.

Inspired by Chewy Thompson, an American man who promised to walk an inch for every follower he had on Instagram, Tim Myers decided to apply the same idea to his gambling. Beginning in February 2024, Myers began betting 10c per Instagram follower.

On day 1, Myers wagered $1,500 on one hand. On day 90, he wagered $195,000.

Today, he has over 3 million fans following his daily betting antics, which many dub their ��daily dose of dopamine��.

From owning a humble farrier business in Taranaki to spending six figures on a single hand in Canada, Tim Naki��s life has undoubtedly been forever changed because of this insane blackjack adventure.

Why Is Everyone Talking About Him?

Tim Naki��s blackjack series is the very first of its kind. When he started, there��s no way he could have predicted quite how great his bets would become. However, he made his promise, and he stuck to it. It was both the quantity of the bets themselves and his own sparkling personality that attracted millions of followers.

Whether you��re celebrating his wins or commiserating his losses, watching a Tim Naki stream feels like you��re punting with a pal. It��s no wonder this card game connoisseur has amassed more than 3 million followers during his blackjack journey.

From his hilarious jabs at the dealers to his genuine enthusiasm for every sized win, Tim Naki has established himself as one of the most down-to-earth, relatable, and fun streamers to watch.

However, there are a few vocal followers who believe his enormous wagers aren��t entirely self-funded.

Since Degeneration Nation is sponsored by SpinBit, the online casino platform that Tim Naki uses to play blackjack, some fans believe it is SpinBit who is depositing the cash into his account. If this is the case, it would be extremely similar to the frenzy caused by Drake when he started gambling on (and was subsequently sponsored by) Stake.com.

Unlike his slot streams, Tim Naki��s blackjack games aren��t live-streamed. Instead, they are filmed, edited and posted the next day, which is why a thread of Reddit users believe he replays some games using SpinBit��s money until he hits a huge win.?

Whether or not this is true, Tim Naki himself popped up to shut things down. In response to a Reddit thread titled ��Tim Naki��s run has to be too good to be true��, the Kiwi gambler wrote: ��I think you��re all really overcomplicating this. I have played 64 hands, won 39, lost 22, and pushed 3. I have a 61% win rate. There is nothing more to it than dumb luck.��

Tim Naki Reddit response

Tim Naki��s Best Moments

Beyond his incredible winning streak, his dealer observations are what sets Naki apart from other streamers (and what keeps people watching his whole reels and not just checking the comments for the day��s updates).

Flexing his natural Kiwi humor, Naki makes entertaining comments – which he calls ��soft insults�� – about the croupiers to fill in time while they are shuffling and dealing cards. Some of the most popular ��soft insults�� include:

  • ��This guy looks like he definitely drinks banana milk.��
  • ��Moses has done his best work parting the sea on top of this woman��s head.��
  • ��He gives a strong impression that he hangs out around laundromats pinching women��s undergarments.��
  • ��He definitely eats his pizza with a knife and fork.��
  • ��His eyes are quite close together��I was once told never to trust a guy whose eyes are that close together.��

Summary Of Tim Naki��s Wins And Losses

  • Total wins: $4,633,293 NZD ($2,833,629 USD)
  • Total losses: $1,698,181 NZD ($1,038,573 USD)

Before turning his hand to blackjack, Tim Myers was (and still is) a keen horse bettor. In a recent interview with Punters, Myers described his first devastating loss and first major win, both of which occurred on horses.

During his training as a farrier (a horseshoeing specialist), Myers and his brother pooled a month of their apprentices�� wages on a horse in the 2015 Melbourne Cup. When the horse broke down, it was a ��crippling blow for all concerned��, and the pair lived off ��Mi Goreng noodles for the coming weeks��.

On the other end of the scale, his biggest payoff occurred during the 2023 Melbourne Cup when he discovered an inflated promo price on one particular horse. Thanks to a couple of loopholes and some no-cap betting, Myers and his friends managed to clean up and somehow ��got one over on the bookies��.

Naki��s Famous Blackjack Series

Early in 2024, Myers hit his biggest-ever slot win and landed the capital to begin his blackjack series. The win in question – $262,280 NZD on Pragmatic Play��s Madame Destiny Megaways slot – occurred on January 17th, 2024, giving him the financial freedom to place his first $1,500 blackjack hand two weeks later on February 2nd.

Throughout the three-month series, Tim Myers hit some historical and life-changing milestones. The Kiwi bettor won 10 out of 14 hands in his first two weeks, reached 150,000 followers in just over three weeks, and secured over $100,000 profit in 26 days.

Over the next 10 days, he accrued another $100,000 in profit, hitting the 200k mark by day 36. Myers landed his biggest win yet – $108,000 – on day 42, though he also suffered his biggest loss less than 24 hours later.

After losing $30,000 in one hand, Myers dropped the stakes from 10c per follower to 2c, though this switch-up lasted just six days before returning to the original format on day 50. The result? A $128,000 win.

Days 57-59 brought three consecutive pushes, the first (and only) of the series. Myers scored 9 wins and 5 losses throughout the next fortnight before venturing to Red Rock Casino to place (and ultimately lose) a couple of five-figure bets on days 74 and 75.

The biggest win of the entire series came on day 80 when Myers left the table with $270,000 after landing blackjack on a $108,000 hand. Finally, after 83 days of playing, he reached the million mark on his second attempt. But while it took him almost 12 weeks to hit this seven-figure status, it took just seven days to deplete his profits back to half a million.

After five eye-watering losses (none costing less than $119,000 per hand), TimNaki finally decided to cut his losses and conclude his three-month blackjack series. Ending with half a million in profit and over 1.2 million more followers, it��s safe to say that despite his many, many losses, the project was a roaring success.

A Closer Look At Tim Naki��s Wins And Loses

So, how many ups and downs did Myers face during his 90-day blackjack marathon? Check out the exact numbers below (figures are in NZD unless otherwise stated).

Days 1-30:

  • Day 1: Won $3,000 with a $1,500 bet
  • Day 2: Won $3,750 with a $1,500 bet using the previous day��s profits
  • Day 3: Won $3,060 with a $1,530 bet, ending $5,200 in profit
  • Day 4: Won $3,400 with a $1,700 bet
  • Day 5: Rounded his $1,950 up to $2,000 and lost, ending his four-day win streak
  • Day 6: Lost a $2,360 hand
  • Day 7: Lost a $3,100 bet, landing him in the negative for the first time
  • Day 8: Won $7,100 with a $3,550 hand, breaking the losing streak
  • Day 9: Won $7,800 with a $3,900 bet
  • Day 10: Won $8,200 with a $4,100 bet, used the profit to place a $4,100 Super Bowl multi bet
  • Day 11: Doubled down on $4,400 bet and won $17,600
  • Day 12: Won $9,860 with a $4,930 bet, resulting in a five-day win streak and $38,000 profit
  • Day 13: Won $10,640 with a $5,320 bet, credits Taylor Swift and her lucky 13 for the win
  • Day 14: Jumped from 15,000 to 59,700 followers in two weeks, resulting in a $5,970 bet (on which he suffered a huge double-down loss)
  • Day 15: Won $12,400 after placing a $6,200 and bringing back his lucky Black Flaps cap
  • Day 16: Won $14,400 after a $7,020 bet in Mexico
  • Day 17: Won $25,000 on a $10,000 hand, a reduced number which was the result of an Instagram user sending thousands of bot followers to his account
  • Day 18: Succumbed to pressure from followers to bet his full follower amount and lost a $15,300 hand
  • Day 19: After confirmation from Instagram that his 157,000 follower count was full of bots, he played an $11,000 hand and lost
  • Day 20: Lost an $11,700 hand
  • Day 21: Won $24,200 with a $12,100 bet
  • Day 22: Won a very swift $31,250 after landing blackjack with a $12,500 hand
  • Day 23: Won $28,400 with a $12,900 bet after pressure from fans to use side bets, resulting in the best side bet win of the entire series
  • Day 24: Won $24,000 with a $13,500 bet (side bets don��t pull through this time)
  • Day 25: Won $35,000 with a $14,600 bet
  • Day 26: Won $30,000 with a $15,000 bet after hitting 150k followers, reaching six-figure returns for the first time and securing over $113,000 profit in 26 days
  • Day 27: Won $37,800 with a $15,600 bet, resulting in a $22,500 profit for the day
  • Day 28: Lost a $17,000 bet
  • Day 29: First day in Vegas, won $25,000 USD with a $10,000 USD hand
  • Day 30: Second day in Vegas, won $25,000 USD with a $10,000 USD hand

Days 31-60:

  • Day 31: Third day in Vegas, won the same again and continued the three-day streak
  • Day 32: Final day in Vegas, and the house finally won
  • Day 33: Won $40,000 with a $21,000 bet ($500 on each side bet)
  • Day 34: Lost a $21,500 bet
  • Day 35: Won $45,500 with a $22,500 bet using side bets
  • Day 36: Won $91,600 after doubling down on a $23,200 bet, hitting over $200,000 profit
  • Day 37: Lost a $24,000 bet but scraped back $3,500 on a side bet
  • Day 38: Lost a $24,500 bet
  • Day 39: Lost a $25,200 bet but gave away $2,500 to fans after breaching 250,000 followers
  • Day 40: Lost a $26,200 bet
  • Day 41: Lost a $27,000 bet
  • Day 42: Won $108,000 after doubling down on a $28,000 bet, ending a five-day losing streak (the longest of the series)
  • Day 43: Returns on March 20th after a six-day hiatus and loses a $30,000 hand
  • Day 44: Lowers stakes from 10c per follower to 2c after input from fans, loses $6,140 bet
  • Day 45: Lost a $6,200 bet
  • Day 46: Won $12,480 with a $6,240 bet
  • Day 47: Won $12,520 with a $6,260 bet
  • Day 48: Upped the stakes at 5c per follower, won $30,000 with a $15,750 bet
  • Day 49: Back to betting 2c per follower, loses a $6,360 bet
  • Day 50: Returned to 10c per follower and won $128,000 from a $32,000 hand
  • Day 51: Won $66,000 with a $33,000 bet, finally returning to over $200,000 in profit
  • Day 52: Won $64,000 with a $34,000 bet
  • Day 53: Won $70,000 with a $35,000 bet
  • Day 54: Won $79,000 with a $35,500 bet, including a $10,000 win on side bets
  • Day 55: Lost a $37,600 bet
  • Day 56: Wins $80,000 with a $40,000 bet
  • Day 57: $42,600 bet returned after the first push of the series
  • Day 58: $45,000 bet returned after ��back-to-back Alabama Specials��
  • Day 59: $46,000 of $48,000 bet returned after ��trifecta of pushes��
  • Day 60: Won $100,000 with a $51,400 bet

Days 61-90:

  • Day 61: Won $135,000 with a $56,000 bet
  • Day 62: Lost a $60,200 bet
  • Day 63: Won $120,000 with a $64,000 bet
  • Day 64: Lost a $68,000 bet
  • Day 65: Won $140,000 with a $70,000 bet
  • Day 66: Won $140,000 with a $72,500 bet, hits half a million
  • Day 67: Won $156,000 with a $78,000 bet
  • Day 68: Lost an $81,000 bet
  • Day 69: Won $160,000 with an $83,000 bet
  • Day 70: Won $164,000 with an $86,000 bet
  • Day 71: Lost a $91,000 bet
  • Day 72: Won $180,000 with a $94,000 bet
  • Day 73: Lost a $96,500 bet after revealing a $666,000 total profit
  • Day 74: Lost $50,000 after switching from online to physical poker at Red Rock Casino, Vegas
  • Day 75: Won $160,000 with a $50,000 online bet but lost $30,000 at Red Rock Casino
  • Day 76: Won $206,000 with a $103,000 bet
  • Day 77: Lost a $104,000 bet
  • Day 78: Won $224,200 with a $104,400 bet, including $22,000 on side bets wins
  • Day 79: Won $250,000 with a $106,000 bet
  • Day 80: Won $270,000 with a $108,000 bet, two back-to-back blackjack days
  • Day 81: Lost a $111,000 bet
  • Day 82: Won $226,000 with a $113,000 bet
  • Day 83: Won $230,000 with a $115,000 bet, breaching the million mark on May 3rd
  • Day 84: Lost a $119,000 bet
  • Day 85: Lost a $120,000 bet
  • Day 86: Won $242,000 with a $121,000 bet
  • Day 87: Won $240,000 with a $122,600 bet, this time including side bets (despite claiming ��side bets are for mugs��)
  • Day 88: Lost a $124,000 bet
  • Day 89: Lost a $129,000 bet
  • Day 90: Lost a $195,000 bet, spending what was left in his account and ending the three-month blackjack series

What Is Tim Naki��s Net Worth?

Tim Naki started streaming long before his blackjack series began. The Taranaki native uploaded his first slot stream via Instagram in January 2023 and joined YouTube in September 2022. He has also been wagering on horses since 2015, so he has almost a decade of horse race betting profits (and losses) behind him.

As such, it��s impossible to tell exactly what his net worth is. All we know is how much he has made from his blackjack winnings (a hefty sum) and how much he takes home from his regular slot streaming.

Of course, having skyrocketed into the mainstream and immortalized himself in the gambling hall of fame, it��s likely that TimNaki will have sponsorship offers coming up the wazoo. As such, his net worth will only increase even further over the next few months.

Tim Naki��s iconic series wrapped up after 90 days, leaving him the opportunity to start something completely new and exciting. And what did he do? Restarted his blackjack series, this time at 1c per follower (to be fair, he has a lot more followers now than when he originally began. And why fix what��s not broken?) We certainly can��t wait to see what he gets up to in the future.

Lead Image Credit: @tim.naki

]]>
Everything You Need to Know About Keno https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/everything-you-need-to-know-about-keno/ Mon, 17 Jun 2024 16:21:30 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=11542 Keno is a classic lottery game, but despite being commonly found in land-based and online casinos, it remains untouched by many gamblers. Here are just a few of the vital facts you should know before getting to grips with the game.

How Do You Play Keno?

Often compared to lottery games, it’s simple to learn how to play keno. Players must place bets by choosing numbers that are usually listed between 1 and 80. After all bets have been placed, 20 numbers are then drawn randomly using balls from a machine or a random number generator.

Players win if their numbers are drawn.

What Is The Most Interesting Part Of Keno History?

It is believed that keno has origins that can be traced back to the Han Dynasty in China over 3,000 years ago. The word keno comes from French and Latin, roughly translating as five winning numbers.

There is also n epic legend that surrounds the inception of keno. The story has it that the game was responsible for saving a city from falling during a war. It has also been credited with raising funds to build the Great Wall of China.

During the 19th century, the Chinese derivative of the word keno was ��white dove ticket��. This was due to results of the games hosted in the big cities were transferred to smaller villages far away by carrier pigeon.

The first evidence of lottery games being played in China were documented in 1847 when the Portuguese government in Macao made the decision to begin granting licences to lottery operators.

a sketch of ancient Chinese gambling den where people play keno
Image Credit: digitalhistoryproject.com

As the game became more popular in China, it was played using characters on sheets of paper as opposed to numbers. The game finally made the leap from China to the western world when Chinese immigrants travelled across the Pacific Ocean to the US to construct the First Transcontinental Railway.

Keno’s popularity increased rapidly and by 1866 the game was hugely popular across the US in its current form that we recognize today.

Where Can I Find Free Keno Games To Play?

A number of online casinos offer free play versions of keno. Examples of this include Balls, Hot Shots, Ultimate Keno, Keno Kick Off, Jackpot Keno, Klub Keno, Vegas Jackpot Keno, and Instant Keno 80 Balls. Many more versions of keno are available to play online.

A screenshot of online Keno gameplay
Image Credit: metazone.co.uk

Are There State-Backed Keno Games In The US & Canada?

State-backed keno games are available across the US and Canada. States in the US that offer keno lottery games are Connecticut, Delaware, District of Columbia, Georgia, Kansas, Kentucky, Maryland, Massachusetts, Michigan, Missouri, Nebraska, North Carolina, Ohio, Rhode Island, Tennessee, and Washington.

In Canada, keno is one of the most frequently played lottery games in the country. It is available to play across all the regional lottery corporations.

Is Keno Really A Random Game?

Yes. There are two formats under which keno are played. The first is where a random selection of 20 numbered balls are released from a rotating barrel. The second is where a random number generator is used to randomly select the 20 numbers.

Independent audits are also carried out with regularity on the systems used by the operators to ensure fair practice is in place.

Who Are The Biggest Ever Keno Winners?

Keno wins can produce instant millionaires, so when somebody strikes it lucky on the game, it can make headlines across the globe. The largest known win on keno was paid out at the Sam’s Town Casino in Las Vegas when a nurse’s aid who went simply by the name of ��Eddie�� won a staggering $6.4 million.

Other big winners have included a 68 year old widower that sealed a $4.37 million win at the Black Butt Hotel in New Lambton, Australia and an anonymous retiree who bagged a $3.17 million payout at the Jimboomba Country Tavern in Logan City, Australia.

What’s The Difference Between Keno And Bingo?

To the untrained eye, keno and bingo can be easily confused. Essentially, in both games players must try and match their own numbers with a set of winning numbers. However, there are key differences.

In the vast majority of keno games, players are allowed to choose their own numbers. In bingo, players are given cards with pre-selected numbers. The bet value is also more flexible in keno. Bingo only allows you to purchase cards for a set price.

An image of a Keno lounge inside a casino
Image Credit: caesars.com

Can I Guarantee A Win With Keno Formulas On Excel?

The use of Microsoft Excel for attempting to devise a formula for keno has become widely used by gamblers online. The theory is that a formula can be created to work out which numbers are most likely to come out as winning numbers in certain games of keno. The practice has divided opinion.

Many believe that keno is simply a game of chance and that there is no way of working out which numbers are more likely to be chosen than others.

However, there is also the school of thought that if certain numbers are coming out more often then it would make sense to find out which ones they are and then bet on those numbers to increase the chances of matching the winning numbers.

]]>
Which Lotteries Have the Best Odds? https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/lottery-odds/ https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/lottery-odds/#comments Mon, 17 Jun 2024 15:45:57 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=18417 While the largest lottery jackpots often attract the most entries, they often have the longest odds.

Instead, experts say that you should stick with pick-3 or pick-4 games that are only offered to in-state residents. The payouts may be smaller, but your odds of winning are higher.

Another popular option are scratch cards. There are ways you can improve your chances of winning scratch cards, too.

Powerball Jackpot Billboard
Image: Flickr/TonyWebster, CC BY-SA 2.0

Understanding The Odds

According to USC mathematics professor Kenneth Alexander, due to the odds of winning the lottery, it does not make financial sense to play.

He explains that people who play should use it as entertainment only, spending the $2 to get that feeling that you could hypothetically win. The odds are against you that you’ll actually win, but plenty of lottery fans are willing to spend $2 on the fantasy.

But if you are going to play, what are the odds?

If you play the Powerball lottery, you’ll need to match five numbers plus the Powerball to win the jackpot. The odds of scooping the grand prize are 1 in 292,201,338. The overall odds of winning a prize are 1 in 292,201,338, so for smaller cash prizes the odds are a lot better.

Mega Millions odds are even tougher to beat, at 1 in 302,575,350. By comparison, the New York Take 5 odds are 1 in 575,757. Just to put that in perspective: the odds of getting hit by lightning are 1 in 700,000 while the odds of getting dealt a Royal Flush are 1 in 649,740.

The odds are so tough to beat that buying more tickets really doesn’t help. This quote from Professor Alexander puts it into an excellent perspective: ��My favorite description of Powerball odds is that if you’d been buying 1,800 tickets per week since the time of Jesus, there’s a better-than-even chance you wouldn’t have won the jackpot yet.�� Uhh.

Lotteries That Offer Better Odds Of Winning

So, if the odds of winning Powerball is that tricky, which lotteries should you play if you actually want to win?

The experts say that you players looking to win should stick with pick-3 or pick-4 games that are only offered to in-state residents. The payouts may be much smaller, but your odds of winning are significantly higher. You might only win a few hundred dollars, but at least you stand a chance to win back more than you’re spending on tickets.

Some states are more generous than others. Looking at average payout per dollar, Massachusetts state lotteries are the most generous, getting close to 80 cents. Most states range between 60-70 cents per dollar, with some falling well below that.

In fact, if you’re playing state lotteries in West Virginia, you’re looking at just 16 cents of every dollar! That said, you still have a better chance of winning a state lottery in West Virginia than a national lottery.

Another popular option are scratch cards. Because of the range of prizes awarded in scratch cards, you’ll have a 60% or higher chance to make back what you spent on the ticket. Winning a substantial prize can quickly change to 1% or less, but they still tend to payout more often.

This means that you’ll be able to play more scratch cards while staying afloat, compared to other lotteries where the odds are you’ll never recoup your ticket prices. There are a number of ways you can improve your chances of winning scratch cards too.

Scratchcard
Image: Flickr/J.Money, CC BY 2.0

The Biggest Lottery Wins In History

Even though the odds are astronomical, the biggest lottery wins in history come from games like Powerball and Mega Millions. In May 2013, a Florida woman won a jackpot worth about $590 million, which at the time was the biggest jackpot won by a single person.

It’s important to note the number of winners for these prizes. For example, in December 2013, there was a winner in Georgia and California for the $648 million Mega Millions. Both opted for the lump sum payout, getting $173 million each.

After winning the $758.7 million Powerball jackpot in August 2017, the single winner quit her job and took the lump sum payout of $480.5 million before taxes. When the Powerball hit $1.586 billion in January 2016, three winning tickets were sold, which meant they each got about $327.8 million as the pre-tax lump sum.

But the research shows that the fantasy of winning is often way better than the reality. For many, the lottery makes lives worse instead of better. About 70% of people who receive a cash windfall lose it within a few years. Beyond blowing it on frivolous things, many winners end up getting cheated out of cash or losing loved ones.

The best advice if you win?

Hire a financial planner and accountant to help you manage your money for the future. Also, if you live somewhere that allows you to stay anonymous, that’s probably best, unless you want to spend the rest of your life fighting off friends and acquaintances asking you for cash.

]]>
https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/lottery-odds/feed/ 20
The Luckiest Casinos in Las Vegas, According to Tripadvisor Reviews https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/luckiest-vegas-casinos-tripadvisor/ Thu, 23 May 2024 09:44:09 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=36422 Las Vegas is the global hub for 24/7 entertainment with an endless variety of experiences, from thrilling F1 events to star-studded shows and concerts. Yet, the city is undeniably famous for its casinos, an integral aspect of the adult playground that is Las Vegas. From the flashing lights of slot machines to poker faces in high-stake games, the city truly caters to all sorts of visitors.

This had us thinking, which casinos are the “luckiest” of them all? We curated a list of the 15 most popular Las Vegas Strip casinos and scraped Tripadvisor reviews to analyze which are perceived as fortunate according to visitors. Our focus was on extracting keywords associated with great luck, such as ��lucky��, ��luck��, ��won��, ��winning��, ��success��, ��jackpot��, and ��hand pay��.

Key Findings:?

  • The Mirage is the ��luckiest�� casino according to Tripadvisor users, with 6.03% of reviews associated with an experience of ��good luck��
  • Resorts World Las Vegas is revealed to be the ��unluckiest�� casino, with only 0.78% of reviews associated with ��good luck��

Casinos with the highest probability of hitting the jackpot (according to reviews)

Although we can��t guarantee any wins for you, our data instead shows which Strip casinos hold the highest to lowest probability of winning, according to previous visitors�� experiences.?

Note: In May 2024, The Mirage announced it would be closing its doors after 34 years on The Strip and rebrand into the new Hard Rock Hotel & Casino and Guitar Hotel Las Vegas. The Mirage’s closure means that The Venetian takes its place as the “luckiest” casino in Las Vegas this summer.

Mirage, mirage, on the wall, who��s the luckiest of them all? Our data reveals that The Mirage��s casino holds the highest probability of winning. It��s not just their artificial volcano that��s erupting nightly, because luck seems to be pouring across people��s Tripadvisor reviews. With 6.03% of reviews associated with the theme of luck, we��d say it might be worth a visit.

The Venetian doesn��t just excel at replicating Venice��s canals, but also being the second luckiest casino on The Strip as attested by previous visitors�� reviews. Out of the significant 2,867 reviews, a notable 5.92% resonated with positive sentiment towards luck. The Venetian��s Tripadvisor casino reviews also boast the highest count of ��jackpot�� mentions and second-highest count of ��won�� mentions, overall. One user titled their review, ��We got lucky so of course this casino is excellent hahaha,�� while another participant witnessed a lady win three jackpots on the Buffalo Machines! Talk about great luck.

Next in the lineup of luck-infused casinos on The Strip is the ARIA Resort & Casino, claiming its spot as the third luckiest, according to our review analysis. With 5.55% of ARIA��s reviews corresponding with all-things luck, the numbers speak volumes; they also have the highest count of ��hand pay�� mentions and the third-highest count of ��jackpot�� mentions, overall. One lucky visitor even went on to say that they won a hand pay jackpot on their second visit to ARIA. What a lucky streak!

But you know what they say����What goes up, must come down,�� and in the realm of luck, Resorts World Las Vegas seems to be facing a downhill trajectory. Our analysis reveals that only 0.78% of luck-related keywords found their way into Resorts World Las Vegas��s Tripadvisor reviews, earning the title of ��the unluckiest casino on The Strip��. The lack of fortune is palpable, as their reviews hold more mentions of the term ��disappointed�� than any lucky keywords. It��s probably wiser to divert your attention to their shopping mall or unwind at the resort, instead of rolling the dice at their casino.?

After soaking in the electrifying vibes of the U2 concert at the Sphere or tying the knot in front of Elvis, your next adventure awaits you down The Strip. Embrace the unpredictability of chance down the dazzling streets that is Las Vegas!

Methodology

To determine the “luckiest” and “unluckiest” casinos on The Strip, we conducted a thorough keyword search within the review sections of each casino��s respective Tripadvisor pages. The following terms were searched and tallied: lucky, luck, won, winning, success, jackpot, and hand pay. We ensured that there was no duplication of keywords within the same person��s review.

After crunching the numbers, we calculated the percentage of luck-related mentions in each casino��s total Tripadvisor reviews. Please note that we focused solely on each casino��s dedicated Tripadvisor page, rather than their hotel and resort Tripadvisor pages.

This data was collected in November 2023.?

Fair use

Feel free to use the data or visuals on this page for non-commercial purposes. Please be sure to include proper attribution linking back to this page to give credit to the authors.

For any press questions, please contact rhiannon.odonohoe[at]casino.org

]]>
Everything You Need to Know About WinStar World Casino: The World’s BIGGEST Casino https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/the-biggest-casino-in-the-us/ https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/the-biggest-casino-in-the-us/#comments Fri, 26 Apr 2024 16:01:40 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=20025 Oklahoma’s WinStar World Casino and Resort is not only the biggest casino in the US, but the biggest casino in the world!

Below you��ll find out everything you need to know about the sprawling casino-hotel-entertainment complex, which put a small town in Oklahoma on the map over 20 years ago.

Want to know how many table games you can play? Whether you can bring the kids? Which mega band are performing next? Or where you��ll be able to grab a bite to eat? We��ve got you covered��

WinStar World Casino & Resort Quick Facts

Owners: The Chickasaw Nation

Open since: 2003

Size: Roughly 600,000 sq. ft. of dedicated gambling space, including eight different plazas offering table games, slot machines, a poker room, bingo hall and betting parlor.

Where: 777 Casino Avenue, Thackerville, Oklahoma. Around an hour��s drive from both Oklahoma City and Dallas.

Fun fact: Located in Love County, only five miles away from the Texas border, Thackerville was last estimated to have a population of just over 400 people. So, the largest casino in the US is situated in one of the country��s very small towns��

Rooms: 1,495 with roughly 1,395 of those rooms at the main complex, and the remainder off-site.

WinStar World Casino and Resort
Image: winstar.com

WinStar World Bars and Restaurants

At last review, pre or post-casino snacks included staples such as pizza, fries, pies and burgers, with guests able to tuck into everything from fancy steak, through to Mongolian dishes and buffets.

WinStar has plenty of options to help you keep your hunger at bay. From fine dining to casual eats, restaurants and bars include:

  • Vino��s Italian Kitchen
  • Chips N�� Ales
  • NYC Burgers & Dogs
  • Matadors Pizzeria
  • El Fenix
  • Toby Keith��s I Love This Bar & Grill
  • Capisce Ristorante Italiano
  • Le Paris Bakery & Cafe
  • Legends Bar & Grill
  • IHOP Express
  • Panda Express
  • Gran Via Buffet
  • The Rotunda Bar
  • Dairy Queen
  • Kirby��s Steakhouse
  • Khan��s Fire Mongolian Grill
  • Palladium Sports Lounge
  • Terrace Cafe
  • Red River Grill
  • Cafes & Quick Bites
  • Mist Nightclub
  • Skyline Lounge

Winstar Age Limit: Is WinStar Family-Friendly?

To visit the gaming area or play any of the casino games, guests must be at least 18 years old. However, kids can still eat at the resort��s restaurants and attend shows in the events center if accompanied by an adult �� but they must not be left alone.

New York Gaming Plaza at WinStar Casino
Image: winstar.com

What Can You Do At WinStar World Casino & Resort?

Get a glimpse backstage at the Global Event Center:

  • The casino area offers more than 10,000 electronic games, 100 table games including crowd-pleasers and traditional favorites like blackjack and roulette, and a 55-table poker room. The bingo hall seats around 360 people.
  • Away from the casino, WinStar boasts a 6,500-seat event venue, making it a big draw for live music. WinStar World Casino & Resort has previously hosted Pitbull, KISS, Bob Dylan, and many other huge names.
  • For those that like to pair the fun of the gaming floor with pampering and wellness, there��s a championship golf course and academy, a spa, gym, hot tubs, and a swimming pool with cabanas, bungalows and day beds.
  • There are plenty of places where visitors can carry on the party into the early hours, including Mickey Mantle’s and Palladium Sports Lounge.

The Good:

  • Since its grand unveiling, the resort has hosted performances from famous faces such as Kelly Clarkson, Lynyrd Skynyrd, James Taylor and Maroon 5.
  • The hotel offers a real holiday resort experience across its four different accommodation areas and showcases 24-hour room service, fitness facilities and a luxury pool.
  • The casino��s nine gaming areas are named after world-famous cities such as Cairo, Paris, Rio and London, with a theme to match.
  • The poker room and Rio gaming plaza are both non-smoking, so everyone can enjoy their time on the floor.
WinStar World Casino pool area
Image: winstar.com

Wonder what the gaming plazas look like? Take a tour through WinStar��s Rio section:

The Bad:

  • No dogs allowed. If you��re staying at the casino��s hotel you��ll have to leave your furry friend elsewhere. Only service animals are allowed on the casino��s premises. It might be the biggest casino in the US, but there��s no room for your pooch.

What People Are saying:

  • One TripAdvisor reviewer said, ��I come at least once a month for a two day sabbatical of fun, relaxation and gambling��.
  • ��Awesome slot machines, many of which are interactive,�� said one recent visitor, ��We like how the casino is divided into different regions of the world and the shuttle service that will take you from one end to the other. Food choices are great and tasty��.
  • One guest, writing on TripAdvisor described it as a ��Fun place to visit and play�� and the food as ��excellent��.
  • Another TripAdvisor review said that the ��hotel accommodations were superior��, ��gaming was enjoyable�� and the ��overall stay was a pleasure��.
  • ��Huge casino with all the sensory experience you could ever want. It was fun,�� stated a customer on the casino��s Facebook page.

Upcoming Events

You can find a list of regularly updated events on their site, but notable entertainment in 2024 includes:

  • Stevie Nicks: May 10th 2024
  • Duran Duran: May 19th 2024
  • Kevin Hart: June 22nd 2024
Lucas Oil Live at Winstar Casino
Image: winstar.com
]]>
https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/the-biggest-casino-in-the-us/feed/ 3
What Are The Odds of Winning The Lottery & Why Do People Still Do It? https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/why-people-play-the-lottery-despite-terrible-odds/ https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/why-people-play-the-lottery-despite-terrible-odds/#comments Tue, 16 Apr 2024 12:16:13 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=11349 The odds of winning the top prize in some of the most popular lotteries range from 1 in 302,575,350 to 1 in 13,983,816. Or in other words, very close to zero. And yet, it is still one of the most popular and respected games of chance.

In this article, you will see what the odds of winning the lottery are, why they are so low, whether you can increase them (and how), as well as why people continue to play.

What Are The Odds Of Winning The Lottery?

The odds of winning the lottery depend on each lottery design, but are usually one in millions, tens of millions, or even hundreds of millions.

The probability of winning a prize in a given lottery is the ratio between the number of combinations eligible for that prize, and the total number of possible combinations from all of the lottery numbers.

In most of the lotteries, winning the highest prize or the jackpot assumes hitting all the numbers in the draw, which forms one single combination. Therefore, the probability of winning the top prize is usually the easiest to work out: it is one in the total number of possible combinations.

In math terms, the odds of winning a prize in a lottery is a “combinatorial probability”.

Almost all state lotteries actually display odds charts on their sites. But for now, let��s see what the odds of winning three of the most popular lotteries are: 6 from 49, Mega Millions, and Powerball.

Odds Of Winning The 6 From 49 Lottery: 1 in 13,983,816

In this lottery, 6 numbers are drawn from 49, and a line to play consists of six numbers. To win the top prize, a player must hit all the six numbers in their line.

Since the number of all possible number combinations is 13,983,816, the probability of winning the top prize with one played line is 1 in 13,983,816. This latter number is nearly the population of Rwanda. Winning the top prize is like picking one given person in this population blind-folded. 

For the second category of prizes (five numbers hit out of six) the probability changes to 1 in 54,201, which is still very low. This is the equivalent to being randomly picked from the crowd of a full and large stadium.

For the third category of prizes (four numbers hit out of six), the probability is 1 in 1,032. Comparing to the previous ones, it may seem a decent probability, but it’s actually still low �C it��s like someone opening the Miriam-Webster dictionary for you, and you correctly guessing the page they opened it to, without seeing the action.

Odds Of Winning The Mega Millions Lottery: 1 in 302,575,350

In the Mega Millions lottery, the numbers are drawn from two separate pools �C five numbers from 1 to 70 (the white balls) and one number from 1 to 25 (the gold Mega Ball). You win the jackpot if you hit all six numbers drawn.

The white numbers can be combined in 12,103,014 different ways. Multiplying this number with 25 (the number of possibilities for the gold ball), we get 302,575,350 possible number combinations for the entire draw – an astronomical number! In kilometers, this is almost twice the distance from the Earth to the Sun.

The probability of winning the jackpot is very close to zero: 1 in 302,575,350. If we write this fraction as a decimal number, we can see eight zeroes after the decimal point: 0.000000003304961.

The odds for the next categories of prizes are much higher than for the jackpot, but still very low:

  • 1 in 12,607,306 for the second category (hitting five white numbers)
  • 1 in 931,001 for the third category (hitting four white numbers and the gold ball)
  • 1 in 38,792 for the fourth category (hitting four white numbers)

Odds Of Winning The Powerball Lottery Jackpot: 1 in 292,201,338

Powerball lottery winner
Image credit: Idaho Lottery/Flickr, CC BY-NC-SA 2.0

The Powerball lottery is very similar to the Mega Millions lottery in terms of structure, rules, prize categories, and the odds of winning. There are five white numbers to be drawn from 1 to 69 and one (red) Powerball number from 1 to 26.

The Grand Prize (for hitting all six numbers) has a probability of winning of 1 in 292,201,338.

  • The second-category prize (for all five white balls hit) has a 1 in 11,688,053 probability.
  • The third-category prize (four white numbers and the red number) has 1 in 913,129.
  • The fourth-category prize has 1 in 36,525 probability.

The Odds Of Winning The Lottery Visualized

Those with a sense of numbers may qualify the odds of winning the lottery (either the jackpot or even the near-winning categories) as very low or close enough to zero. But for most people, understanding the probability of winning the lottery is a matter of perception.

The best way to form an objective perception is by comparing the odds of winning a lottery to the odds of other rare events or phenomena in daily life.

The Odds Of Getting Struck By Lightning vs Winning The Lottery

Lightening strike
Image credit: Sean McAuliffe/Unsplash

According to the US National Weather Service, the odds of someone being struck by lightning in an 80-year lifetime are 1 in 15,300.

That��s about 19,100 times higher (more likely) than the odds of winning the Powerball��s Grand Prize, with one played line in a given draw.

The Odds Of Being Hit By A Meteorite vs Winning The Lottery

Or take the event of being hit by cosmic objects: According to earth sciences Professor Stephen A. Nelson from Tulane University, the odds of someone being hit by a meteorite, asteroid, or comet during their lifetime are 1 in 1,600,000.

That��s about 20 times higher than the odds of winning the Mega Millions jackpot.

The Odds Of A Shark Attack vs Winning The Lottery

Perhaps one of the most unwanted deadly events, a shark attack during one��s lifetime is estimated by the International Shark Attack File to have 1 in 11.5 millions odds.

The Odds Of A Plane Crash vs Winning The Lottery

Or, take a more domestic example such as a flight. A Harvard University study cited by The New York Times estimated the odds that your airplane will crash are 1 in 1.2 million.

This is about 12 times higher than the odds of winning the 6 from 49 lottery with a one-line ticket.

Note: These odds estimations are “statistical-average extrapolations” rather than accurate probabilities �C such events or phenomena cannot be accurately quantified given the multitude of physical factors involved. However, these figures are very relevant when it comes to perceiving the mathematical probability of winning the lottery, as they can be interpreted in terms of ��real happenings�� and physical possibilities.

Why Are The Odds Of Winning The Lottery So Low?

Image credit: Dylan Nolte/Unsplash

The odds of winning the lottery are so low because of the multiplication power of combinations.

For instance, the number of permutations (possible ways in which a number of things can be arranged) of 4 objects is 1��2��3��4 = 24. With 5 objects, it jumps to 120 (1��2��3��4��5). Then for 10 numbers, it reaches 3,628,800.

These types of multiplications (called factorials) are how we work out the number of combinations of a given number of objects (numbers/balls, in our case). They then get multiplied by other factors and increase the value of the final result. What is important to remember is that the higher the number of possible combinations, the lower the probability of hitting one in a draw.

The parameters of lottery designs as numbers are not that big: 40, 50, 60, or 70 numbers to draw from and 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7 numbers drawn. When someone sees these small numbers and doesn’t know about the power of combinations, it can be difficult for them to understand how to get to that huge number of 1 in millions, tens of millions, or hundreds of millions.

The Odds Of Winning The Lottery Twice

You may fairly ask: If the odds of winning the lottery at a given draw are so low, how low are the odds of winning it twice?

Of course, the answer depends on a variety of factors, such as the kind of win and the number of draws that take place.

If we take the probability of two wins in two draws, it is simply the square of the probability of a win in a draw. For instance, winning the fourth-category prize in the Powerball lottery (having the probability 1 in 36,525) twice in two given draws has the probability 1 in 1,334,076,859.

If the number of draws or of wins is larger than two, the probability changes. Let��s take a few examples:

  • Winning it twice over 1,000 draws gets a probability of about 1 in 2,778
  • Winning it twice over 5,000 draws gets a probability of about 1 in 122
  • Winning it three times over 5,000 draws gets a probability of about 1 in 2,702

Despite the low odds, there are players who have won the lottery more than once, and this was not always down to pure luck, as we will see in a next section…

Can You Increase Your Chances Of Winning A Lottery?

The straight answer is ��yes��, but the only way to increase your odds of winning the lottery is to play as many lines as possible per draw.

That��s because any two combinations of numbers have the same chance of winning, even if they share some numbers. For example, [2, 5, 27, 32, 45, 46] has the same probability as [1, 5, 27, 35, 40, 41].

This is the reason why any elaborate playing strategy (including those based on number selection) is not worth the analysis. Their effectiveness simply comes down to the number of lines played.

Is It Worth Investing?

The downside of such a strategy (if we can call it a strategy at all) is that you would need to play such a large number of lines to increase the probability of winning by a decent amount. It would turn into a serious investment with a high risk. You could end up in winning in one or several categories of prizes that would make your overall prize lower than your investment.

For instance, say you buy 1,000 lines on your tickets at the 6 from 49 lottery, which would cost around $1,000 or more. By doing so, you are increasing your odds to 1 in 13,984 for the top prize, 1 in 54 for the second-category prize and to almost 1 (that is, a sure event) for the third-category prize.

The first two probabilities remain low, and you are likely to win one or more prizes in the third category, which may not cover your investment.

Losing Powerball tickets
Image credit: Scott Mindeaux/Flickr, CC BY-NC-ND 2.0

But It Has Been Done

And yet, several players have won the lottery more than once. For a few of them, it was a matter of pure luck, but for most, it was due to an elaborate plan.

The unbeaten record is that of the Romanian mathematician Stefan Mandel, who won 14 different lotteries.

His plan was not based on any scheme of choosing numbers or combinations, but to cover as many combinations of numbers as possible. The only feasible way to do that was to work in a team. This way, the investment and the risk was shared, even though the win would be split between the players.

With this plan, the toughest task is to convince enough investors to join. But even then, it’s a logistical nightmare. It requires identifying the lotteries with the best odds, using algorithms to generate the combinations, checking the jackpots regularly, getting in on the action at the right time etc.

But Mandel succeeded and became a millionaire. He was subsequently investigated by the FBI, who found him clean.

Playing in a team is the only reasonable way to increase your chances of winning with the lowest risk. However, the risk still exists. The lottery will always be a game of chance where the house always wins.

Lucky Numbers And Curious Lottery Draws

Many people who play the lottery use ��lucky�� numbers that have significance in their lives. For example, numbers representing birthdays of their family members. They may also avoid certain numbers or combinations, such as lines with consecutive numbers, thinking that these combinations are very unlikely to be drawn.

Would you play the line 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 in a lottery? If not, why?

If you were to play a particular line that the majority of players avoid, and that line ends up winning, you would receive a larger prize, because the prize fund would be divided among fewer winners. That��s an objective reason for playing that line, not avoiding it!

In June 2022, seven consecutive numbers occurred at a Virginia Lottery draw in the US (13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, and 19). The odds of that particular combination being drawn are about 1 in 3.8 million, but the same odds apply to any other combination.

The event exploded in the news as a ��crazy draw��. I was interviewed by The Washington Post about this draw and told them that such event is not amazing from a probabilistic perspective, but rather from a regular lottery player��s perspective. Players can see that any outcome is possible. Such a draw will perhaps occur again in the next one hundreds of years or more.

The lottery is the simplest game of chance. As long as any combination has the same probability of being drawn, there is no real strategy for choosing numbers.

Why Do People Still Play The Lottery?

A player playing one line in the 6 from 49 lottery regularly, will have to play 13,983,816 times to expect a big win. This would mean playing for about 291,392 years (with one draw weekly).

Even assuming the player plays 100 independent lines each time to enhance the probability of winning (which would be costly), they would still have to wait about 2,914 years for a win.

Of course, this estimation is made in terms of statistical averages and not actual possibility, but it is a relevant model of objectively perceiving the odds of winning the lottery. So, why do people still play the lottery against the minute odds of winning? Or, why don’t people try other forms of gambling games with better odds?

Most psychologists explain this behavior like they would for a general case of problem gambling �C overestimation and misperception of odds, the availability bias, the gambler��s fallacy, the sunk-cost fallacy, the illusion of control, and the near-miss effect.

Among these factors, the availability bias is particularly relevant for the lottery.

The Availability Bias

Lottery winners with “mind-blowing” wins are heavily publicized, which may cause you to overestimate your own likelihood of winning (��If they succeeded, so can I��).

Mega Millions winner
Image credit: Idaho Loterry/Flickr, CC BY-NC-SA 2.0

However, the existence of a winner does not indicate any good odds, but just that the game is so popular that people usually buy enough tickets together to cover the winning combination, whatever that will be, or at least a big share of the possible combinations.

However, our mind is biologically setup to rely on sure facts; having a winner is a sure fact, while probability is something unsure.

Other Psychological Factors

Another factor is hope and positive expectation – emotional states that influence the perception of the real odds. An unrealistic hope and desire may lead to misperceiving the real mathematical probability for the desired event to happen.

Other psychological factors specific to lottery are the social-trap (regular players argue that they cannot give up at some point before recouping previous investment) and the easy-to-justify factor (players think that the cost of a play is low enough and shares of the profit of the lottery companies go to good causes).

There are also views that fun and entertainment play an equally important part. They argue that most lottery players seek the thrill of the possibility of winning, fantasizing about excessive wealth. It’s easy to spend happy time imagining ��what if��. 

These views were supported by a study whose authors found that participation increased the happiness of participants before the draw.

The Odds Of Winning The Lottery: Final Thoughts

The phenomenon of playing the lottery against the minute odds of winning is complex, with mathematical, psychological, and social dimensions.

The fact that the joy of playing is one of the factors is both rewarding and moralizing. One of the main responsible gambling norms says that when you no longer have fun with gambling, you should quit. This also applies to lottery: If you no longer find the lottery entertaining, all that is left are its ��almost impossible�� odds.


For similar articles, check out our article on what to do when you win the lottery.

Lead image credit: Vic/Flickr, CC BY-NC-ND 2.0

]]>
https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/why-people-play-the-lottery-despite-terrible-odds/feed/ 2
What Ever Happened To Tommy Hyland? https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/tommy-hyland/ Wed, 10 Apr 2024 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=38289 Card-counting hero and blackjack legend Tommy Hyland earned a place in the Blackjack Hall of Fame back in 2002 �C but where is he over two decades on?

Tommy Hyland
Image credit: Blackjack Hall of Fame

Early Life and Introduction to Gambling

Born in New Jersey in the 1950s, Thomas Hyland��s introduction to gambling came from his father, who occasionally gambled at the local racetrack or pool hall.

In his teens, Hyland began collecting bets from his fellow high school students. He would produce photocopies of standard parlay cards and hand them out to his classmates. He even started creating his own spreadsheets, allowing other students to place wagers on high school sports.

All this saw Hyland draw in profits of $30 to $50 a week, which was a considerable amount of money at the time.

Once of age, Hyland began visiting Atlantic City and Las Vegas casinos and was irreversibly sucked into the casino buzz. He figured that by developing unique strategies, he could count card decks perfectly before deftly rounding them off the blackjack table.

Even so, Hyland never set out to pursue a career in casino gambling. In fact, he had very little success in his first few visits to casinos. However, this only encouraged Hyland to continue practicing his card counting techniques. Life as a professional blackjack player crept up on him, and since the late ��70s, he hasn’t looked back.

The Hyland Blackjack Team

In the ��80s, he further fueled his passion for blackjack, having read Lawrence Revere��s book Playing Blackjack as a Business. Piquing the interest of like-minded gamblers, Hyland recruited a 4-member blackjack team to whom he taught his genius tricks of the trade.

One of which was his roommate. The pair of them would regularly sit together at $5 blackjack tables, one of them counting the low cards and the other counting the high cards. By whispering their findings to each other, the pair could make more educated bets. They raked in over $4,000 each!

Finding trustworthy team players can be very difficult, and it’s an even further stretch to recruit team members with equal blackjack knowledge and talent.

But as is typical with Tommy Hyland �C he knew how to spot specialties. When he was first faced with filling table seats after a few original team members dropped out in the early ��80s, talent-spotting Tommy signed up a few golfing buddies. He then made a routine of replacement to ensure the team never ceased.

Mind you, things didn��t always go to plan for the team, since their techniques seemed too good to be true to jealous competitors. In 1994, three of the group were arrested in Ontario for suspected shady gaming. Thankfully, the judge recognized that Hyland��s gaming strategies were all above board. There was no evidence of any cheating – the group was genuinely genius.

Tommy Hyland’s ‘Secret’ Strategies

Hyland is renowned for being the original player to use ace sequencing to beat blackjack. This blackjack strategy involves tracking aces throughout a game before predicting when they will reappear from the shoe. Pretty clever, huh?

As Hyland started playing blackjack at a time when advanced play methods were still under construction, he was at an advantage. Hyland is sure to go down in history as one of the pioneers of shuffle tracking and ace sequencing techniques.

Targeting Atlantic City casinos, Hyland��s 4-man band began offering ��early surrenders��. This means players surrender a hand before the croupier checks for an organic blackjack.

This technique lowers the house edge by a small margin (when compared to a no surrender option). Early surrenders have an even more profound effect on the house advantage than the number of card decks.

With their blackjack tips and tricks close to their chests, Team Hyland used their expertise and a healthy mix of the era��s friendly rules to succeed rapidly. Within weeks, they��d made a $50,000 profit in Atlantic City.

To this day, pit bosses are hard-pushed to spot professional gamblers who utilize such advanced strategies. But they��ve had the time to fine-tune their spotting skills �C unlike the casinos tormented by Hyland��s team antics back in the day.

Hyland��s Mark on History

To this day, there is no inkling to suggest that any other blackjack team has stood the test of time as Tommy Hyland��s did. With successes from the ��70s into the early noughties, Hyland��s crew eventually had to hang up their blackjack hats when casinos recognized each team member.

Usually, Hyland��s team would wait months before returning to a casino they��d already played in, in an attempt to avoid getting barred. They��d even go in subtle disguises. Some team members would shave their hair, dye it or grow it out, while others would grow or shave their beards.

One December, Hyland hilariously went dressed up as Santa Clause. So much for being inconspicuous. So, the game was up �C for now.

As good as Hyland is a blackjack player, he��s just as good a manager. The mogul regrouped his clan and kept them playing for more than 40 years. Though he quit managing some time ago, Hyland can still be found trying his trusty hand out at a few tables in Atlantic City.

Tommy Hyland Today

That said, don��t be fooled into thinking Hyland only retired �C he��s reaped the benefits of his card game fame with a few short trips down other showbiz avenues.

In 2002, Hyland became one of the inaugural members to be indicted into the Blackjack Hall of Fame alongside the likes of Arnold Snyder, Edward O. Thorp, Ken Uston, Peter Griffin, and Stanford Wong.

The Blackjack Hall of Fame at the Barona Casino
Image credit: Wikipedia, CC BY-SA 3.0

Alongside this esteemed honor, Hyland��s seen his fair share of success on the big and small screens.

Starring in the Hot Shoe as himself in 2004, Hyland agreed to a documentary movie about card counting for the casino game, 21. The director himself invested $5,000 of the movie��s budget to learn the counting methods and put them to the test on screen.

A year later, Hyland featured in an episode of Breaking Vegas �C a TV series about people who have attempted to make fortunes by playing games against the house.

Not quite finished with the excitement of ��lights, camera, and action��, Hyland then enjoyed a role in Inside the Edge: A Professional Blackjack Adventure. The docufilm gives you a sneak peek into the world of professional blackjack players as they take on casinos for millions of dollars.

These days, his long-supporting wife gets to see a lot more of her husband, since he and his team aren��t causing such a show on the casino floor. His net worth is still reported to be over $1 million.

]]>
Dream Job: Test the Latest Record-Breaking Cruise Casino ? https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/cruise-casino-tester/ Thu, 29 Feb 2024 12:09:43 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=38506 Ahoy matey! Time to ��seas�� the day with the ultimate dream job because we��ve got the perfect gig that��ll make waves in 2024!  

Princess Cruises�� newest $1B cruise masterpiece, Sun Princess, just set sail – and it touts the cruise line��s grandest cruise ship casino. Picture this: 9,000 square feet of pure entertainment, with 10-foot-high ceilings filled with dazzling lights, and a gaming paradise of 227 slot machines and 13 live table games.  

If that isn��t exciting enough, here��s the kicker – we��re picking up the tab for you to test Princess Cruises�� record-breaking casino at sea! Have we mentioned that you could be cruising through the picturesque Mediterranean or Caribbean? You really don��t want to miss the boat on this dream job!  

I’m ready to roll the dice. How does it work?

It��s simple – submit your application below, give those fingers a good cross, and hope your name gets picked! If you��re the winner, we��ll take care of your travel expenses and foot the bill for the Sun Princess cruise (Terms and Conditions at the bottom of the page).  

Click here to apply!

All that we ask is for you to test out Sun Princess��s grand casino and share your experience with us! As a bonus, we��ll pocket you $500 to splurge in the casino and another $500 to enjoy outside the gaming floor (or the equivalent in CAD or GBP). Sounds like a win-win situation to us!  

The lucky winner will need to rate the Sun Princess��s casino on a scale of 0 to 10 for criteria such as:  

  1. Game Variety: Is it a meager selection of slot games and tables or a gaming extravaganza?
  2. Betting Limits: What are the betting limits across different games, and does the casino cater to various types of gamblers?
  3. Atmosphere: Is it bland or a captivating gaming haven?
  4. Staff professionalism: The professionalism, friendliness, and efficiency of the casino staff, from dealers to hospitality and security personnel.
  5. Support Services: The availability of support services, including cashiers, player’s club desks, and customer service counters.
  6. Food and beverages: Are there limited gaming munchies or enough to fuel your gaming ambitions?

Don��t fret about the dates yet, as we will work around the winner��s schedule. Your cruise destination will be decided on your residency, availability, and specific cruise line dates. You must be available to set sail between: 

  • UK applicants: June or September 
  • USA and CA applicants: October or November 

*You must be at least 21 years old and have a valid passport to participate.  

Entrance opens from 8am GST on March 1, 2024. Applications close on April 30, 2024 at 12pm GST time. Winners will be notified within 5 working days after the closing date. Please read the Terms and Conditions here.

Disclaimer 

This campaign and any images used on?Casino.org?are inspired by the cruise liner, “Sun Princess”. There is no commercial association between?Casino.org? and the ��Sun Princess�� cruise ship, or its operator “Princess Cruises” or its parent company “Carnival Corporation & plc”. Trademark rights and copyrights relating to the cruise ship “Sun Princess” belong to its respective owner(s) which are not associated with or affiliated with?Casino.org? in any way and did not license rights or authorise or sponsor this campaign.

Fair use 

Feel free to use the data or visuals on this page for non-commercial purposes. Please be sure to include proper attribution linking back to this page to give credit to the authors.  

For any press questions, please contact rhiannon.odonohoe[at]casino.org 

]]>
The Best Slot Machines With Bonus Games https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/the-best-slot-machines-with-bonus-games/ Fri, 16 Feb 2024 15:27:55 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=11568 People like different games for different reasons, but the most popular slots are usually the ones with bonus games.

These juicy extra features can help you become an instant millionaire, so let��s check out some of the best slot machines with bonus games, both online and at land-based casinos.

Best Online Slots With Bonus Games

Starburst

Starburst slot game

A timeless classic that��s super easy to play and great for both big and small bankrolls.

As far as slot games go, it’s quite basic. However, it offers high payouts and the opportunity to win big with the Starburst Expanding Wilds.

When the Starburst Wild appears on the reels (it can appear on reels 2, 3 and 4), it helps to create a winning combo by replacing other symbols. Any Starburst Wilds will also expand to cover the whole reel. You then get a respin with the Wild reel/s.

If you are lucky enough to land five of the Wilds, you��ll walk away with the juicy jackpot!

Starburst has an RTP of 96.09% and a medium variance.

Book of Dead

Book of Dead slot

This Egyptian-themed slot is best for casual players, as the maximum betting amount is lower compared to other games.

That said, you can still win up to 250,000 coins in Book of Dead thanks to its rewarding free spins bonus game.

Landing 3 or more Book scatter symbols will unlock the bonus and take you to the exciting Sacred Chamber bonus round with 10 free spins. It’s possible to re-trigger the free spins infinitely, plus, alongside the unlimited spin, one random feature will also be an expanding symbol to boost payouts.

With a high RTP of 96.21%, it��s worth checking out.

Immortal Romance

Immortal Romance slot

This vampire-themed 243 ways slot game from Microgaming has plenty of ways to win and some incredible bonus action to sink your teeth into.

It has a four-level bonus round �C the Chamber of Spins �C that unlocks as you play.

  • Your first bonus is 15 free spins that multiplies winnings by 5x.
  • Once your Chamber of Spins meter reaches five, you’ll unlock 15 free spins and the Bat feature.
  • At 10, you’ll activate 20 free spins with a Cascading Reels feature.
  • After the 15th trigger, you unlock 25 free spins with a Wild Vine feature.

Alongside the generous 96.85% RTP, the variance is extremely high. You will have regular small wins but need the bonus games for bigger payouts.

Overall, expect tons of free spins and wilds features, with the chance to win its mega 3,645,000-coin jackpot.

Bigger Bass Bonanza

Bigger Bass Bonanza slot

This slot is a follow-up game to Big Bass Bonanza. It’s pretty similar to the original, give or take a few extras, like the expanded reel set and earning potential.

You��ll find a solid free spins feature with rewarding wilds, plus a fish scatter worth 4,000x your bet.

This free spins bonus is the center of the game and the path to bigger wins. You receive 10, 15, or 20 free spins on 3, 4, or 5 scatter symbols. During free spins, wild symbols help to stack wins, and the angler character collects the wilds. Every 4th wild that lands will deliver 10 more free spins, with multipliers of 2x, 3x, or 10x.

It has a high RTP of 96.71% and high volatility.

Fruit Party

Fruit Party slot

Although Fruit Party looks pretty plain and basic, it offers some nice features and a great jackpot prize of 5,000x your bet.

You can get free spins with no limit on how many times they can be retriggered, as well as the Random Multiplier feature, which can show up at any point.

The base game’s Random Multiplier feature offers 2x boosts, which also appear during the Free Spins round. In this bonus game, you get 10 free spins that enable stacking multipliers. Here, you can build random multipliers up to 256x your stake.

Fruity Party has a RTP of 96.47% and medium variance.

Wheel of Fortune

Wheel of Fortune slot

A back-to-basics video slot that has become a cult classic, Wheel of Fortune delivers big wins on a Tripler Big Spin feature.

Yes, the game borrows the name from the iconic game show, but actually has little resemblance to it. Featuring 5 reels and up to 720 paylines, Wheel of Fortune has a higher variance and slightly above-average RTP of 96.1%.

There are several bonus games to sink your teeth into, including Wild Bonus and the Mini Wheel. You can also unlock the Wheel of Fortune Bonus for 5 symbols that could land 10,000 coin wins.

The Triple Extreme Spin Bonus allows you to choose a random envelope, which then provides a multiplier on spins. These multipliers can lead to the top payout of 5,000,000 coins.

Divine Fortune

Divine Fortune slot

Divine Fortune is a popular progressive jackpot game from NetEnt. The local progressive jackpot opens by getting three gold coins and has an average payout of around $115,000.

There is a standard RTP of 96.59%, although the jackpot is 4.07%, so the RTP without bonus is 92.52%. Even in the non-jackpot game, big wins can happen thanks to four different bonus rounds.

Falling Wilds Respins can happen when a wild hits the reels. It will shift one position and provide a Respin. Overlay Wilds can land on top of a wild and expand across the whole reel. The Divine Fortune free spins round delivers up to 12 free spins, and the Falling Wilds Respins and Overlay Wilds are available during free spins.

Best Land-Based Slots With Bonus Games

Many of the slot titles below are also available to play online.

Whether you prefer to play from the comfort of your own home, on the go, or in your local casino, there��s an option here for you!

Cleopatra

Cleopatra slot

This Egyptian-themed slot machine has stood the test of time – and for good reason.

Players can trigger a free spins bonus round where 15 free spins are up for grabs with a 3x multiplier.

During this bonus round, you can trigger more free spins, up to a maximum of 180.

It��s one of the more simplistic bonus features around but the payouts make it worthwhile.

There have been a number of follow-ups to the game, including Cleopatra Plus, Cleopatra Mega Jackpots and Cleopatra Gold.

Whether it��s the classic or a newer rendition, there��s going to be a version you��ll love.

Zeus

Zeus slot

Another classic favorite, this Greek mythology-themed slot offers a 5-reel, 30-payline game where you can win up to 100 free spins as a bonus.

The potential wins from those free spins have helped propel the slot into slots immortality.

Follow-up releases of Zeus II, Zeus III, and Zeus: God of Thunder have been equally well received by slots players.

10, 25, or 100 free spins are available for 3, 4, or 5 scatter symbols, respectively, and you can re-trigger unlimited times.

Buffalo

Buffalo slot

The legendary Buffalo slot from Aristocrat is a superbly volatile game with 1,024 paylines.

This means you can win money really quickly and those wins are easy to come by, but your bank balance can also plummet quickly too �C so be careful.

The bonus round in this game is where you can really make your money. You get free spins, which might sound standard, however, they have a twist.

During the Free Spins bonus, you get up to 20 spins with wild symbols up to 3x. A wild symbol helps to potentially stack multipliers up to 27x, and you can also re-trigger the free spins.

Similarly to Cleopatra, there are also some newer versions of the game that offer exciting twists on the original.

Book of Ra

Book of Ra slot

This 5-reel, 10-payline slot has proved particularly popular in Europe, with Novomatic really pushing it in a number of countries in that region.

The jackpot is great on this game, though with just 10 paylines, you will need to rely on Lady Luck to help you win.

The bonus round is packed with expanding symbols, which is ideal for bringing in extra wins.

10 free spins are available, with up to 5,000x your bet up for grabs if the whole game grid has the expanding symbol.

Wins are not frequent due to the extreme volatility and 95.1% RTP, but when they do land, the payouts can be big.

Rainbow Riches

Rainbow Riches slot

Initially, players were critical that Rainbow Riches didn��t offer a free spins bonus round.

However, when it soon became obvious how incredible the Pots of Gold Bonus, Road to Riches Bonus, and Wishing Well Bonus were, it was clear the lack of free spins didn��t matter.

And the jackpot is insane!

It��s no surprise that this game spawned several sequels online including Rainbow Riches: Reels of Gold and Rainbow Riches: Pick ��n�� Mix.

Rainbow Riches is a medium volatility game with an RTP of 95.1%.

Bier Haus

Bier Haus slot

The graphics and animations might be a little dated, but Bier Haus continues to be a hugely popular title among slots players.

The Oktoberfest-themed title has a great RTP of 96.28%, which is above average for land-based slots.

The free spins feature is its biggest feature, which doesn��t sound as impressive as other games on this list, but will be huge if you land it. 

You can get up to a maximum of 80 free spins.  There are also Persisting Wilds (sticky wilds) that lock a position for the whole bonus round.

88 Fortunes

88 fortunes slot

The free spins bonus round and the chance to hit four progressive jackpots mean you��ve got a high win potential in this game, however the game is very volatile.

Fu-Bat is the jackpot feature where you try to match Baby symbols for 1 or 4 jackpots.

Keep your eyes peeled for the Gong Scatters, as if you land three on adjacent reels you��ll trigger the bonus game with 10 free spins. The features also replaces low-value symbols with high-value symbols.

88 Fortunes has an RTP of 96% for the non-jackpot game.

Try Before You Buy

If you want to get a feel for any of these games before you play them at the casino or online, we suggest trying out the free version first.

This way you can get a sense of their volatility, how they work and whether you think it��s worth your while before risking any real money.

]]>
How To Gamble Responsibly (And Stop When You Need To) https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/top-10-tips-for-responsible-gambling/ Mon, 12 Feb 2024 11:59:42 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=16216 How To Gamble Responsibly

1. Remember: It’s Paid Entertainment

Gambling is a fun form of entertainment, but it’s important to think of it in the same way you might buy a movie ticket or a fair ride. It’s exciting during the experience, and if you happen to win something extra, that’s great. But the point is to enjoy the core time and experience.

2. Set a Money Limit

It can be hard to keep track of money in the heat of the moment. That’s why it’s important to set a gambling budget, one that still gives you plenty of cash for your normal expenses, and stick to it. If you go through all the money, it’s time to stop.

3. Set a Time Limit

Whether you’re winning or losing, time seems to run at a different pace when you’re gambling. Make sure that you set a time limit for your gambling, making time for other exciting or important activities.

4. Don’t Chase Losses

Some days you’re up and some days you’re down. As long as you stay within your gambling budget, it should still be fine. It’s important you avoid gambling more in the hope of making back lost money. This is called chasing losses and can lead to problem gambling.

5. Avoid Becoming Too Superstitious

Prefer a lucky table, or keep playing the same game where you won big? No problem! But remember that gambling is all about luck and chance, and no amount of superstition will change the outcomes. Also, being lucky or unlucky in gambling does not relate to your overall luck as a human being!

6. Never Fall for the Gambler’s Fallacy

Gambler’s fallacy is the belief that if an event has happened more frequently than expected, such as a dice roll showing the same number multiple times in a row, it is less likely to happen again in the future, or vice versa. This is an incorrect belief.

The probability of hitting red 2 times in a row might be way higher than 8 times in a row, but that doesn’t mean that just because the roulette wheel has shown red 5 times, it has to be black the next spin. Each outcome in any game of chance is independent of what happened before it. Don’t assume that results will change because of how the game has gone so far.

7. Learn the Rules and Odds of the Games

While blackjack and craps might have some of the best odds in a casino, they still have certain bets with comparatively bad odds. On the flipside, overall odds are worse for slots and keno, but people can still win big and have tons of fun. What’s important is to learn the rules and understand the odds of the games you enjoy. Some games are more entertaining than others for certain people, no matter the odds.

8. Don’t Play with Money You Don’t Have

Whether it’s using a credit card or borrowing from friends and family, never play with money you don’t have. It’s meant to be a fun pastime, so if you can’t afford it, it’s best not to gamble at all.

9. Avoid Gambling Under the Influence

Gambling is often paired with a fun atmosphere, complete with all the usual party essentials. But whether you’re under the influence of alcohol, or a high roller friend on a winning streak, avoid gambling while intoxicated. Your decisions won’t be as good, and you might play beyond your money or time limits.

10. Gamble During the Good Times

Gambling should be fun and exciting, best enjoyed with friends. If it becomes an escape during depression or hard times, it’s more likely to become a problem. So, enjoy gambling during the good times, but don’t fall back on it to solve your issues when times are tough.

An image depicting gambling addiction
Image: ‘Gambling Addiction’ by Nick Youngson, licensed under CC BY-SA 3.0

When gambling stops being fun and is no longer within your control, it’s time to start taking the steps to stop.

How to Stop Gambling

1. Admit you have a problem

The first step to overcoming your addiction is acknowledging that you have a problem, which isn��t an easy thing to do. You will feel emotionally confused: the rational part of your personality will be telling you to stop because you know it��s destroying your life, while the other side of you will be craving the highs of gambling.

It��s time to seek out help and there are multiple ways you can do this.

2. Speak to someone you trust and join a support group

It is important that you confide in someone who you feel comfortable talking to and who will be able to offer you emotional support. Together you can create a plan of action. Whether you want to combat your addiction without professional help or you’d prefer to see a trained specialist, they will act as your guide throughout.

Many people find it helpful to speak to others in an online gambling addiction forum or read each other��s stories to help stay motivated. It is hugely comforting to know that you��re not alone.

3. Block your access to gambling

Delete any gambling apps, block any gambling websites, and leave any tip forums that you think could tempt you to relapse. You can use a self-exclusion tool like GAMSTOP to automatically block you out of hundreds of gambling and betting sites.

You can also limit your access to gambling by avoiding land-based casinos full stop, as well as avoid hanging around with any friends or family who enjoy gambling recreationally.

4. Take control of your finances

Ask your supportive friend or family member if they can manage your finances for you, at least for a month or two while you deal with your addiction. This does not mean asking them to pay off your debts – it means giving them control of your money. They can manage your bank account and credit cards while you seek out debt management help.

5. Keep yourself busy

Like any addiction, withdrawal is the hardest part. To overcome it you need to keep busy. We suggest picking up a new hobby, like a physical activity that can give you a rush – rock climbing is a great option. Many people also find taking up yoga and meditation can help with the feelings of guilt and anxiety that often come hand-in-hand with a gambling problem.

Visit our gambling addiction help page, which has been verified by two addiction specialists, for more information and a comprehensive list of resources.

Lead image credit: Getty Images

]]>
Superstitious Showdown: Gamers vs. Gamblers vs. Sports Fans https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/superstitious-gamers-gamblers-sports/ Tue, 23 Jan 2024 10:43:01 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=37390 In the realm of high-stakes gaming events, it��s no secret that participants rely on a superstition or two – claiming them as their ��lucky charms��. Whether you��re a video gamer immersed in a gaming league or tournament, an online gambler hoping for a royal flush, or an avid sports fan watching the playoffs, someone out there is either crossing their fingers or wearing a lucky jersey for a stroke of luck. 

Given the prevalence of superstitions in the gaming, gambling, and sports communities, we couldn��t help but wonder, ��Who��s the most superstitious?�� To find out, we conducted a nationwide survey and questioned 1,000 video gamers, 1,000 online gamblers, and 1,000 sports fans in America about their superstitious habits. 

Key Findings:

  • Sports fans rank #1 most superstitious among the three groups. Their top superstition? Sporting a lucky piece of clothing, according to 48.4%
  • Video gamers�� (32.9%) and gamblers�� (34.4%) top superstition is performing a specific action (like button spamming or screen tapping)
  • The ultimate superstition among all three is wearing a lucky piece of clothing, as collected by 27.9% of votes 

Who��s putting the ��super�� in superstitious?

It doesn��t matter if you��re fighting for the Fortnight Champions League title, trying your luck in a poker tournament, or watching your favorite team in the playoffs – superstitions are just a part of the game. But the real question is, who takes the crown as the most superstitious among the three?

#1: Sports Fans – 30.7%

#2: Gamblers – 30.6%

#3: Gamers – 19.2%

Sports fans are truly putting the ��super�� in superstitious, as they rank #1 according to our nationwide survey. Although they��re not in the field, rink, or court, they play their part with a superstition or three. It��s the least they can do, right?

Following right behind, gamblers come in a close second – with 30.6% declaring themselves superstitious. When there��s a cash prize of $100 or $1,000 at stake, you best believe they��re wearing their lucky red t-shirts and crossing their fingers! 

Finally, video gamers rank last in our superstitious standings (19.2%). However, don��t let the percentage deceive you, as respondents swear by their superstitions – especially when participating in prestigious tournaments such as the Legends World Championship or Call of Duty League.

Leveling up luck: A look into video gamers�� superstitious habits

In their quest to dodge the dreadful ��game over�� screen, our gaming respondents rely on a set of superstitions to level up, win tournaments, or simply a PvP game with frenemies. 

In the gaming world, the go-to superstition for the gaming community is to perform a specific action, as voted by 32.9%. Whether it��s button spamming during a loading screen or simultaneously mashing buttons like A and B, it��s their way of summoning luck to the digital arena. 

Setting the stage for a successful match involves getting into the right mindset. Ranked second by 21.0% of gamers, listening to a specific song is their secret weapon – whether it be rap, pop, or��jazz? Take Jann Mardenborough, for example, featured in the latest film, ��Gran Turismo�� – a sport/action-packed movie documenting his rise from winning the Nissan PlayStation GT Academy video game competition to becoming an actual professional race car driver. He reveals in the film that his go-to song for luck is ��Songbird�� by Kenny G, a smooth jazz piece featuring a soprano saxophone. Gotta getcha head in the game, right? 

Winning the bronze, a unique 11.9% of gamers resort to ��other�� superstitious habits that weren��t listed in our survey. Some examples include double-saving before exiting a game or even sticking to a specific in-game character. This just goes to show the other creative ways gamers seek their digital luck. 

In fourth, 9.8% of gamers opt to wear a lucky piece of clothing, whether that be a lucky t-shirt or sweater. Rounding off the top five in a two-way tie, 8.4% choose to eat a specific meal and an equal 8.4% rub a lucky item, such as a token, dice, etc.

Honorable mentions: 4.2% avoid a certain food (6th) that they believe brings them unfortunate luck, and 3.5% wear a certain color (7th) for good luck.

Lucky clicks: Online gamblers�� superstitious habits

With a jackpot on the line, our gambling respondents reveal the wild cards of superstitions they��re playing in the world of online gambling. 

Cross my fingers and hope to win! The most popular superstition according to 34.4% of gamblers is performing a specific action. Some believe physically tapping the screen as the reels spin tips the odds in their favor, while others resort to the timeless act of crossing their fingers. For any dice-related games, you can bet they��re blowing on those in-person or virtual dice for a stroke of luck!

The runner-up of gambling superstitions is the act of rubbing a lucky item, as endorsed by 26.6% of respondents. The ranking of this age-old ritual comes as no surprise within the gambling community. While many swear by the power of dice rubbing, others substitute the dice with a cherished token or coin for that luck-boosting power.

Landing in third place in our superstitious rankings is wearing a lucky piece of clothing, according to 14.3% of gamblers. A shining example is Kim Dong-Jae, a pro poker player and contestant from South Korea��s popular intelligence game show, ��The Devil��s Plan��. Dong-jae swears by his lucky sweater, a garb that has accompanied him through numerous poker tournaments and game show challenges. Although he didn��t win ��The Devil��s Plan��, fans noticed that he wore his sweater for a friend in the finale, resulting in their triumphant win. Dubbed the ��true MVP of The Devil��s Plan�� on Reddit, his lucky sweater is a testament to this gambling superstition. 

Rounding out the top five, 10.4% listen to a specific song (4th) while 5.8% prefer ��other�� superstitious methodologies (5th). 

Honorable mentions: 4.5% wear a certain color (6th), 1.9% avoid a certain food (7th) and an equal 1.9% eat a specific meal (also 7th). 

Fanatic rituals: Superstitious traditions among sports fans

Touchdown! Sports fans are pulling out all the stops with their favorite superstitions to get their teams that winning edge. Time to huddle up and dive into their playbook of superstitions.

Sporting their game-winning attire, almost half (48.4%) of sports fans wear their luckiest piece of clothing – making it the #1 superstition in the sporting community. From team jerseys to, believe it or not, lucky underwear, fans are dedicated to superstition. Even professional players like Jason Giambi embrace the ritual, as he famously sported a golden thong to break free from his performance slump. You gotta do what you gotta do, right? 

Sprinting into second place, 25.3% of our sports enthusiasts wear a certain color – whether it��s their team��s colors or their personal lucky color(s). Grabbing the bronze medal, a spirited 11.3% perform a specific action like lucky dances, chants, or even a tap or two on the team mascot��s statue just outside the field or rink. Even Lebron James, himself, performs his own trademark gesture – the iconic powder toss. 

Crossing the finish line in our top five, only 5.0% listen to a specific song, tuning into the ��I��m feeling lucky�� zone (4th), while 4.1% bring their own playbook of ��other�� superstitions to the field (5th). 

Honorable mentions: 2.7% eat a specific meal (6th), an equal 2.7% rub a lucky item (also 6th), and 0.5% avoid a certain food (7th). 

The saga of sports fans’ superstitions doesn��t end here, however. We��ve unraveled which major professional sports leagues have the most superstitious fans; and which teams across every league have the most superstitious fan base, overall. Our Most Superstitious Fan Bases Across Major Professional Sports Leagues study breaks down the details of these sports-related rituals, adding that extra layer of intensity to the game-day experience. 

Overall rankings: Most popular superstitions among the three

Uniting the three superstitious communities, the #1 leading ritual embraced by gamers, gamblers, and sports fans alike is donning their lucky piece of clothing – according to 27.9%. Trailing closely behind in second place, 24.2% perform a specific action. Claiming third, 13.1% of our overall respondents choose to sport a specific color as their good luck across the board. 

Conclusion

While each of the three groups has their distinct favorite superstition, the common thread that binds them is their shared superstitious spirit. Whether you��re attending or participating in a high-stakes game or event, let our results serve as an inspiration for adopting a superstition or two.

Methodology

In January 2024, we surveyed a total of 3,000 U.S. residents. We surveyed 1,000 video gamers, 1,000 online gamblers, and 1,000 sports fans about their pre-game rituals and/or superstitions. We asked them a series of questions to discover which participators are the most superstitious. 

The average age of video gamers was 34.3 years old. The representative sample comprised of 61.4% male, 33.7% female, 3.5% non-binary, 1.3% transgender, and 0.1% identified as ��other��. 

The average age of online gamblers was 40.1 years old. The representative sample comprised of 54.3% male, 44.0% female, 1.1% non-binary, and 0.7% transgender.

The average age of sports fans was 40.4 years old. The representative sample comprised of 66.2% male, 33.0% female, 0.7% non-binary, and 0.4% transgender. 

Fair use

Feel free to use the data or visuals on this page for non-commercial purposes. Please be sure to include proper attribution linking back to this page to give credit to the authors.

For any press questions, please contact rhiannon.odonohoe[at]casino.org

]]>
What Ever Happened To Brian Christopher? https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/what-ever-happened-to-brian-christopher/ Fri, 12 Jan 2024 11:25:00 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=36807 On June 17 2006, Brian Christopher launched his slot-themed YouTube channel, Brian Gambles, and he hit the jackpot. His videos were a hit, showcasing the ups and downs of his slot gameplay in land-based and online casinos.

Then suddenly, his world came crashing down. Citing a breach of the terms and conditions in 2018, YouTube shut down his account and removed his channel from its listings.

The reasoning that YouTube��s parent company gave was that one of his videos violated the site��s terms and conditions relating to�� ��violent or dangerous acts.�� Suddenly, Christopher was left battling to save his channel.

So, what happened to Brian Christopher?

Brian Christopher’s rise to fame

Slot machines had a particular reputation when it came to gambling. While sports betting and table games like poker have always piqued the interest of a younger audience, some saw slot machines as gambling for retirees.

Then online gambling exploded, and the top game producers suddenly created captivating titles that featured great graphics, engaging bonus rounds, and unique features. These titles introduced slot games to a new generation of players.

Brian Christopher launched his career by traveling throughout the US, heading to land-based casinos and playing slot machines. He would chronicle his wins and losses in his typical style, making large bets, living on the edge, and trying to win the jackpot. Views poured in, and a fanbase around Christopher emerged.

Christopher would also answer live questions from fans throughout his videos, which connected his subscribers to him. In this sense, he was ahead of his time.

Now, with the rise of game streaming services like Twitch, a regular back-and-forth between subscribers and content creators is common. Then, he was at the forefront of this movement.

Brian Christopher’s YouTube channel seemed to tap into an audience who wanted to see more of the real ups and downs of gambling. In doing so, he became the poster boy for the new world of slot games.

Brian falls foul of YouTube��s regulations

In 2018, Christopher began to receive warnings from YouTube. Alphabet (YouTube’s parent company) had warned the channel for videos containing ��violent and dangerous acts,�� even though the most violent Christopher ever got was perhaps clicking on a slot game a bit too vigorously.

Later in the year, in June, the channel was sent another message from YouTube. This message said that it had closed Brian Gambles for repeated or severe violations of YouTube��s community guidelines. For someone who had spent over a decade making videos, this must have felt like his world was crashing down.

Content creation was his full-time job, and he employed two full-time staff. When YouTube deactivated his channel, he looked set to lose hundreds of original videos and the product of nearly 12 years of work. Brian Gambles was also a family affair, and his husband since 2008, Marco, regularly appeared in videos.

Brian Christopher slots with Marco
Image: bcslots.com

Other gambling channels were also affected. The Big Jackpot, which has over 461,000 subscribers and nearly 219 million views, was also suspended as part of a general sweep of gambling creators on the platform.

For Brian Christopher, suspension meant that his ad revenue suddenly stopped, summing $20,000 per month.

But why?!

A sweep that included two of the biggest gambling channels might suggest YouTube was targeting content creators in this field. Despite coming far in the US since the US Supreme Court overturned PASPA, not to mention the popularity of gambling in Europe, US companies were still twitchy when it came to gambling. The irony of the overturning of PASPA coming just one month before Brian Christopher��s channel was suspended won��t be lost on many people.

YouTube’s parent company reasoned that his video “Smokin�� Hot Gems, BIG WIN, Mammoth Power Slot Machine Pokies w Brian Christopher“, violated the site��s terms and conditions relating to�� ��violent or dangerous acts.��

But the disparity between the accusations against the Brian Gambles channel and the reality was another factor dripping in irony. YouTube��s community guidelines offer explicit definitions of harmful content, and Brian Christopher��s videos came nowhere near them.

So, it seems YouTube��s decision to suspend Brian Gambles may not have been due to its content breaking specified community guidelines, but as part of a more comprehensive policy against gambling channels.

Eventually, they relented

Understanding the hollow nature of the cited breach of community guidelines, Brian Christopher decided to appeal the decision and restore his channel. He explained that he had not breached guidelines and that he followed all of YouTube��s rules.

YouTube rejected his appeal without a proper explanation. Other requests by channels like The Big Jackpot also failed.

Then, without warning, YouTube contacted Christopher to inform him they were reinstating his channel. As he had explained to them in depth, they concluded that he had not broken any rules. The platform also reinstated other gambling channels like The Big Jackpot.

Some have speculated that an error with the platform��s AI systems led to the sweep of gambling channels in 2018. Others have suggested a broader policy to marginalize gambling content on the platform. Whatever the reason, Brian Christopher was back and able to begin producing content with the rest of his team, including Britt Carter.

He soon changed the channel��s name to Brian Christopher Slots (or BC Slots). While the reinstation allowed him to resume monetization, YouTube seriously damaged the channel��s finances with the suspension.

Where is Brian Christopher Slots today?

Despite all these challenges, BC Slots resumed production of the videos we know and love, and ad revenue continued. Christopher would surely be forever weary of the threat of sudden closure, but rebuilt his YouTube empire.

In July 2022, he even created his own slot game with Gaming Arts. Christopher debuted his new slot machine Pop��N Pays More at the Plaza Hotel & Casino in Las Vegas.

Brian Christopher slots
Image: @BCSlots / X

As of 2024, he has nearly 650,000 YouTube subscribers and nearly 500 million views. Brian Christopher’s net worth, stemming from ad revenue and merchandise sales, is estimated to be around $3 million.

Brian Christopher Slots (or BC Slots) remains one of the biggest gambling channels on YouTube, despite the setback of his suspension. Further questions remain about the fragility of YouTube channels, and soul-searching across the industry about the nature of Alphabet��s platform governance continues.

As BC Slots shows, arbitrary suspensions can have a real financial impact on YouTubers. But Brian Christopher’s decision to continue on the platform shows that creators have few options but to co-exist with YouTube��s management.

Users love to consume the content that Brian Christopher Slots creates, but if platforms have the ultimate say in what can and can��t be hosted on its sites, that relationship is precarious.

If it happened once, who can say it won��t happen again?

For something similar, check out What Ever Happened To Tommy Hyland.

Lead Image: @BCSlots / X

]]>
Being A Casino Dealer: A Dream Job Or A Nightmare? https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/being-a-casino-dealer-dream-job-or-nightmare/ https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/being-a-casino-dealer-dream-job-or-nightmare/#comments Wed, 03 Jan 2024 14:02:32 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=2667 If you love gambling, being a casino dealer may seem like the greatest job in the world. You get to play the same games you already love, only from the other side of the table �C meaning you��ll get to win a little more often than you already do.

Sure, you don��t get to keep the winnings, but they pay you, right? Plus you��ll be getting tips from grateful players, and you��ll always be at the heart of the action when someone wins a big jackpot.

With the gambling market getting more competitive every day, casinos everywhere are looking for qualified dealers to fill jobs.

But despite that initial rush of excitement you might feel when considering going into the dealer business, there are some factors you��ll want to consider before taking the plunge. Here��s a look at a few of the benefits �C and drawbacks �C of taking a job as a dealer at a casino.

For more information, check out our comprehensive guide to casino dealers

The Good

1. The Tips

Tips for casino dealer

In the US, tips are where the real cash is made (in some other countries, dealers don��t receive tips, but are compensated with a higher base salary), and that increases the total amount a dealer might make significantly.

On an hourly basis, tips can help dealers bring in anywhere from a few extra dollars to $50 or more per hour, depending on how busy they are, what game they��re dealing, and how generous the players are. The biggest tips come from dealing poker, but with all of the rules (which can also vary from house to house), players, and pots to keep track of, it is also the most challenging and skill-intensive game to deal.

When you include tips (and any benefits the casino provides for its workers), the total amount a casino dealer can make varies tremendously. Many peg it at somewhere between $30,000 and $60,000 a year. Some dealers may make even more than that, pulling in as much as $100,000 or more (though new dealers should know that this is not typical).

Keep in mind that some casinos also pool tips between dealers, meaning that no matter how much your players are rewarding you for your service, you��ll be sharing that with your coworkers �C so you��d better hope they��re doing a good job, too!

Additionally, remember that the biggest whales are not always the biggest tippers; high-roller rooms everywhere are rife with tales of pro player cheapskates (this is typically, but not always, in poker) who throw tipping etiquette out the window, tipping little or nothing after scooping massive pots.

On the other hand, sometimes lower-limit games draw more relaxed, recreational players who tip better because they are just having fun and feel like it’s all found money anyway.

2. The Training

There are some positives to becoming a dealer that you may not have considered as well. Typically, you won��t have to have too much training to get into the field: a qualified dealer school may have you ready to handle at least some games (such as dealing blackjack) in two months or less, and it may cost under $1,000 to get that training. Some casinos even offer in-house training, especially when they��re first opening.

As well as training, being a good casino dealer comes down to how you interact with the players.

For the ��average�� dealer, the amount of money you make will come down to how much the players like you. That means that more skilled dealers will make more in tips, but also that more personable dealers will do better.

If you��re not a ��people person,�� dealing definitely isn��t the profession for you.

3. The Flexibility

The scheduling of a casino can also be a positive for many workers. As most casinos are open 24 hours a day, 365 days a year, schedulers are often flexible for dealers who want to work odd hours or know they need certain times off in advance.

Of course, the scheduler can also be your worst enemy if they only assign you to slow times or they need you to work hours that aren��t convenient for you or your family, or on major holidays when the casino must still be fully staffed for players.

4. The Benefits

At casinos operated by major corporations, the benefits can also be a surprising plus. Many of these casinos offer retirement programs and health plans, as well as flexible time off that can make scheduling personal days and vacations even easier.

You may even be able to transfer to another casino owned by the same operator if you��d like to. You might expect that dealers at upscale Vegas properties would make more in tips than their counterparts at smaller regional casinos, but this isn��t always the case. Sure, if you��re dealing for high-rollers in the VIP room, you��ll want to be at a big casino: those tips are going to be massive compared to the ones you��d see on the regular floor, and those opportunities are only available at luxury resorts.

Alternatively, you could work as a dealer on a cruise ship, which can be perfect if you are willing or interested in traveling to new locations.

Dealing blackjack
Image: AidanHowe/pixabay

The Not So Good

1. The Salary

If you’re thinking about a career in casino dealing, the first thing you��ll need to understand is that the base pay for dealing poker, blackjack, baccarat or other casino games like roulette �C that is, the money the casino pays you directly �C is pretty slim.

When you first start out, you may very well make minimum wage (or less than), rising to $10 or more as you gain experience. According to the Bureau of Labor Statistics, the average base pay for a casino dealer is $34,350 a year.

When a dealer first starts at a new casino, they may be forced to work at games that are slower-paced, less popular, and generate fewer tips. The demand for dealers can be somewhat seasonal as well, and when the casino doesn��t need as many tables open, there won��t be as many hours of work to go around, cutting into the earning potential of working in this field.

2. The Physical Strain

While there are definitely some great things about being a dealer, there are some downsides beyond the salary.

For one, you��d better like being on your feet. Poker dealers may be able to sit and deal their game, but for any other table game, you��ll be standing throughout your shift. You��ll get breaks �C a typical shift pattern for a dealer consists of an hour on the floor, followed by 20 minutes off �C but all of the work you do while standing at the table adds up, and the job can be both mentally and physically tiring.

3. The Rude Players

Though many players are there for a good time, there are some who are just plain rude. You��ve probably already noticed players berating dealers for their own bad luck and poor play, and it only gets worse when dealers really do make mistakes.

But it��s not just the angry players who might get you down. If you don��t think you can deal with taking large sums of money from people at the tables, you may not be able to handle the job of being a dealer on an emotional basis.

4. You’re Being Watched 

Surveillance camera

And remember, you will be under the constant and watchful eye of casino surveillance at all times; their main job is protecting their own money more than their customers’, and to that end, they watch dealers for anything that might look like cheating, collusion or out-and-out theft (of course!).

Deal or No Deal?

While we��ve definitely presented both sides of the coin in this post, we��re not trying to scare anyone away from becoming a dealer. For some, this really is a dream job, and for many others, becoming a casino dealer can be a good way to get into the gaming industry.

If you��re a people person who enjoys the casino atmosphere and can deal with the varying hours and income, then becoming a casino dealer might just be right up your alley. Want to know more? Check out Casino.org’s exclusive and in-depth guide to becoming a casino dealer.

Lead image: Anna Shvets/Pexels

]]>
https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/being-a-casino-dealer-dream-job-or-nightmare/feed/ 8